As 115346 Nu-Ep1 Um 968GB WW GB 2110 1

968GB
EtherNet/IP
Compatible Network Unit
NU-EP1
User’s Manual
Read this manual before using the product in order to
achieve maximum performance.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Compatible with FS-N40 Series, FS-N10 Series,
LV-N10 Series, PS-N10 Series, AP-N10 Series,
LR-T Series, LR-W Series, FD-Q Series,
FD-X Series and LR-X Series.
Introduction
This manual explains information and operation methods for the EtherCAT compatible network
unit, NU-EC1A. Read this manual carefully to ensure safe performance and function of the NU-EC1A.
Keep this manual in a safe place for future reference.
Ensure that the end user of this product receives this manual.
Symbols
The following symbols alert you to important messages. Be sure to read these messages
carefully.
DANGER
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in
death or serious injury.
WARNING
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result
in death or serious injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

CAUTION
in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product

NOTICE
damage as well as property damage.
Important Indicates cautions and limitations that must be followed during opera-
tion.
Point Indicates additional information on proper operation.
Reference Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.
Indicates reference pages.
EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff

Automation GmbH, Germany.
Safety Information for NU-EP1
General Precautions
If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufac-

CAUTION
turer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired.
• Before and while operating this product, confirm that it provides its functions
and performance correctly.
• Implement sufficient safety measures to prevent human and physical damages
in case this product fails.
• Be aware that the product functions and performance are not warranted if the product is
used outside the range of stated specifications or is modified by the customer.
• Combining this product with other equipment requires sufficient consideration
because the proper functions and performance may not be provided depending
on the environment.
• Do not use this product for the purpose of protecting a human body or a part of
the human body.
• This product is not intended for use as an explosion-proof product. Do not use
this product in hazardous locations and/or a potentially explosive atmosphere.
• Do not expose equipment, including peripherals, to rapid temperature changes.
Equipment failure may result from condensation build up.
Precautions for Use
• To avoid injury or failure, turn off the power immediately in the

following cases.
- Water or foreign matter entered the main unit.
- The case is broken, for example if it is dropped.
CAUTION - Smoke or unusual smell is emitted from the product.
• Use the correct power voltage. Failure to observe may result in
injury, or failure.
• Do not disassemble or modify this product. Failure to observe
may result in injury.
Do not turn off the power while you are setting any item.
NOTICE
Doing this may cause loss of data settings.
968GB 1
Equipment Environment
For safe, trouble-free operation of this product, the product must not be installed in the
following locations:
• Humid, dusty, or poorly ventilated.
• Exposed to direct sunlight or heat source.
• Exposed to corrosive or flammable gases.
• Exposed directly to vibration or shock.
• Exposed to water, oil, or chemical splashes.
• Exposed to static electricity.
Noise Protection
If this product is installed in a location near a noise source, e.g., power source or high-
voltage line, it may malfunction or fail because of noise. Take protective measures,
such as using a noise filter or running the cables separately.
About the Power Supply

• Noise superimposed on the power supply may result in malfunction. Use a stabi-
lized DC power supply configured with an isolation transformer.
• When using a commercially available switching regulator, be sure to ground the
frame ground terminal.
Precautions on Regulations and Standards
UL Certificate
This product is an UL/C-UL Listed product.
• UL File No. E222809
• Category QUYX, QUYX7
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product as an UL/C-
UL Listed Product.
• Use this product with one of the following power supplies.
• UL/CSA certified power supply that provides Class 2 output as defined in the
NFPA70 (NEC: National Electrical Code) and CEC (Canadian Electrical Code).
• UL/CSA certified power supply that has been evaluated as a Limited Energy cir-
cuit as defined in UL61010-1 and CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 61010-1.
• For wiring to the power supply connector, use the AWG 12-24 copper wire with
temperature rating 65 °C or more. The marking on the power supply connector
intends to warn this instruction.
• Use this product under pollution degree 2.
• Use this product at the altitude of 2000 m or less.
• Indoor use only.
2 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

CE Marking
Keyence Corporation has confirmed that this product complies with the essential
requirements of the applicable EC Directive, based on the following specifications.
Be sure to consider the following specifications when using this product in the mem-
ber state of European Union.
 EMC Directive
EMI : EN55011, Class A
EMS : EN61000-6-2
• Use an STP (shielded twisted pair) cable for connection to the network.
• The wire connected to the power supply connector must be 30 m or shorter.
These specifications do not give any guarantee that the end-product with this product
incorporated complies with the essential requirements of EMC Directive. The manu-
facturer of the end-product is solely responsible for the compliance on the end-prod-
uct itself according to EMC Directive.
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual - 3

Relevant Manuals
The manuals relevant to this document are as follows:
Manuals related
to CPU unit
PLC CPU unit
EtherNet/IP unit
Manuals related to
EtherNet/IP unit
NU-EP1 (this unit)

This manual
Sensor amplifiers
Manuals for each
sensor amplifier unit
Example) FS-N40 Series

User’ s Manual

Manual Organization
1
This chapter provides an overview of the NU-EP1
Before Using and describes its part names and functions.
1
This chapter explains the procedures for connecting
2
Connection and sensor amplifiers to the NU-EP1 and how to
Configuration communicate.
2
This chapter explains the configuration of
3 Communication memory linked with the EtherNet/IP unit,

and the communication time chart.
3
4
This chapter describes the specifications
Specifications and dimensions of the NU-EP1.
4
5
This chapter provides the parameter list, as well as
Appendix
troubleshooting instructions.
5

Table of Contents
Safety Information for NU-EP1 ...................................................................... 1

General Precautions .......................................................................... 1
Precautions for Use............................................................................ 1
Precautions on Regulations and Standards....................................... 2
Relevant Manuals ........................................................................................... 4
Manual Organization ...................................................................................... 5
Table of Contents ........................................................................................... 6
Terms Used in This Document...................................................................... 9
Chapter 1 Before Using
1-1 NU-EP1 Overview............................................................................... 1-2

Overview ......................................................................................... 1-2
Types and Number of Connectable Sensor Amplifiers ................... 1-2
1-2 Checking the Package Contents ...................................................... 1-3
Package Contents........................................................................... 1-3
1-3 Part Names ......................................................................................... 1-4
Chapter 2 Connection and Configuration
2-1 Steps for Preparing to Use the NU-EP1 ........................................... 2-2

Flow from Installation to Communication Configuration.................. 2-2
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers.......................... 2-3
Connectable Sensor Amplifiers and Quantities............................... 2-3
Connecting the Sensor Amplifier..................................................... 2-4
2-3 Wiring.................................................................................................. 2-6
Connecting the Communication Cable............................................ 2-6
Power Supply .................................................................................. 2-8
2-4 Configuring Communication with NU-EP1 .................................... 2-11
NU-EP1 Settings ........................................................................... 2-11
2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner............................. 2-14
Setting the Scanner....................................................................... 2-14

Table of Contents
Chapter 3 Communication
3-1 What Is EtherNet/IP?.......................................................................... 3-2

What Is EtherNet/IP? ...................................................................... 3-2
3-2 NU-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function ............................... 3-3
Assigning the Sensor ID Number.................................................... 3-4
3-3 Cyclic Communication ...................................................................... 3-6
Configuring Cyclic Communication ................................................. 3-8
Usable Connections ........................................................................ 3-9
Assignment to IN Area (NU-EP1 to Scanner) ............................... 3-11
Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to NU-EP1) ........................... 3-17
Cyclic communication data assignment ........................................ 3-18
Checking the Device Compatibility................................................ 3-25
3-4 Message Communication................................................................ 3-26
Configuring Message Communication .......................................... 3-27
Objects and Services .................................................................... 3-28
Objects Usable with NU-EP1 ........................................................ 3-29
Basic Format for Message Communication and Flow of Process.......3-30
How to Use NU Objects ................................................................ 3-32
3-5 Parameter List .................................................................................. 3-37
Reading the Table......................................................................... 3-37
NU-EP1 (Instance ID: 0) ............................................................... 3-38
FS-N40/N42*/N44* (Instance ID : 1 to 16) .................................... 3-41
FS-N10/N12 (Instance ID: 1 to 16)................................................ 3-53
FS-N14 (Instance ID: 1 to 16) ....................................................... 3-64
LV-N10/N12/N12C (Instance ID: 1 to 16)...................................... 3-75
PS-N10/N12 (Instance ID: 1 to 16) ............................................... 3-87
AP-N10/N10D (Instance ID: 1 to 16)............................................. 3-98
MU-N/LR-T (Instance ID : 1 to 16) .............................................. 3-104
MU-N/LR-W (Instance ID: 1 to 16) .............................................. 3-112
MU-N/FD-Q Series Index (Instance ID: 1 to 16) ......................... 3-124
FD-XA2 (Instance ID : 1 to 16).................................................... 3-133
FD-XA2E (Instance ID : 1 to 16) ................................................. 3-146
LR-X Series (Instance ID : 1 to 16) ............................................. 3-153
Chapter 4 Specifications
4-1 Specifications..................................................................................... 4-2

4-2 Data Processing Time ....................................................................... 4-3
4-3 Dimensions......................................................................................... 4-4

Table of Contents
Chapter 5 Appendix
5-1 Device Profile ..................................................................................... 5-2

5-2 Troubleshooting................................................................................. 5-3
5-3 Default Settings.................................................................................. 5-6
5-4 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix
PLC...................................................................................................... 5-7
Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix
PLC ................................................................................................. 5-7
Procedures for Communication with an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05
PLC ..................................................................................... 5-13
5-5 Objects for Use with the NU-EP1.................................................... 5-18
List of Usable Objects ................................................................... 5-18
Reading Each Object Table .......................................................... 5-18
Identify Object (Class ID: 01H)...................................................... 5-19
Message Router Object (Class ID: 02H)....................................... 5-22
Assembly Object (Class ID: 04H).................................................. 5-23
Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06H)................................ 5-25
TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5H) ...................................... 5-27
Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6H)............................................ 5-31
5-6 Functions which Cannot be Set in Duplicate ................................ 5-35
FS-N40 Series............................................................................... 5-35
FS-N10 Series............................................................................... 5-36
LV-N10 Series............................................................................... 5-37
PS-N10 Series .............................................................................. 5-38
MU-N/LR-T Series......................................................................... 5-39
MU-N/LR-W Series ....................................................................... 5-39
FD-XA2 ......................................................................................... 5-40
FD-XA2E ....................................................................................... 5-42
LR-XN10 ....................................................................................... 5-42
LR-XN12* ...................................................................................... 5-43
5-7 Current Value Property of the Sensor............................................ 5-44
5-8 List of Character String Codes ....................................................... 5-45
5-9 Index.................................................................................................. 5-46

Terms Used in This Document
This document uses the following terms:
Term Description
Sensor A sensor amplifier
Scanner The EtherNet/IP scanner device
Adaptor The EtherNet/IP adaptor device
A sensor amplifier that has a power line and can operate
Main unit
alone
A sensor amplifier that does not have a power line and
Expansion unit
must be connected to a main unit
The name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for sensor
amplifiers
N-bus
The digital fiber sensor FS-N Series, etc., is supported
with this system
Programmable logic controller, an electronic device which
PLC
can freely control the devices by changing the programs
Ladder program A program which controls the PLC

MEMO

Before Using
This chapter provides the overview of the NU-EP1 and describes its
part names and functions. 1
1-1 NU-EP1 Overview .............................................. 1-2
1-2 Checking the Package Contents ........................ 1-3
1-3 Part Names ........................................................ 1-4
- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual - 1-1

1-1 NU-EP1 Overview
1 Overview
The NU-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP communication adaptor. Using EtherNet/IP

Before Using
communication, the ON/OFF output signals and current values of the sensors and
amplifiers connected to the NU-EP1 can be output to a PLC, etc.
The NU-EP1 supports EtherNet/IP cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) and
message communication (Explicit messaging). With cyclic communication, data can
be exchanged without ladder programs. With message communication, the sensor
amplifier's parameters can be read and written, and operation commands for the sen-
sor amplifier can be executed.
 Example of system configuration
PLC or other host device

(EtherNet/IP unit)
NU-EP1 (this unit)

EtherNet/IP
adaptor
N-bus compatible
sensor amplifier
Types and Number of Connectable Sensor Amplifiers
Up to16 N-bus compatible sensor amplifiers can be connected to the NU-EP1.

If the sensor amplifier is N-bus compatible, different models can be connected
together.
"Connectable Sensor Amplifiers and Quantities" (page 2-3)
1-2 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

1-2 Checking the Package Contents
Before using the NU-EP1, verify that the following equipment and accessories are
included in the package.
We have thoroughly inspected the package contents before shipment. However, in the 1
event of defective or broken items, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.
Before Using
Package Contents
NU-EP1 main unit x1 Power supply connector x1
End unit (OP-26751: a set of two pieces) x 1 Instruction manual x1
 List of optional part
• STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable

(Category 5e, straight)
- OP-51504 (0.2 m)
- OP-51505 (0.5 m)
- OP-51506 (1 m)
- OP-51507 (3 m)
- OP-51508 (5 m)
* The working ambient temperature of the above cable is 0 to 50 °C.

1-3 Part Names
This section describes the part names and functions of the NU-EP1.
1
Before Using
(1) RJ-45 connector
(2) Reset switch

(3) Link/activity indicator (green)
(4) Module status indicator (green/red)
(5) Network status indicator (green/red)
(6) Sensor communication indicator
(green/red)
(7) MAC address
(8) Power supply connector
(9) Sensor amplifier connector
Name Description
(1) RJ-45 connector Attach the network cable to this connector.
(2) Reset switch When held down for three seconds or longer, the
NU-EP1 settings will be reset to the default set-
tings.
(3) Link/activity indicator Normal: Green LED lights up or blinks
(green) For details, see "Troubleshooting" (page 5-3)
(4) Module status indicator
(green/red) Normal: Green LED lights up
(5) Network status indicator For details, see "Troubleshooting" (page 5-3)
(green/red)
(6) Sensor communication Indicates the communication status between NU-
indicator (green/red) EP1 and the sensor amplifier.
Normal: Green LED lights up
For details, see "Troubleshooting" (page 5-3)
(7) MAC address MAC address for the NU-EP1
(8) Power supply connector Attach the power connection cable to this connec-
tor.
(9) Sensor amplifier connector Attach the sensor amplifier to this connector.
A protective cover is attached when shipped from
the factory.

Connection and Configuration
This chapter explains the procedures for connecting sensor amplifi-
ers to the NU-EP1 and how to communicate. 2
2-1 Steps for Preparing to Use the NU-EP1 ................. 2-2
2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers ... 2-3
2-3 Wiring...................................................................... 2-6
2-4 Configuring Communication with NU-EP1 ............ 2-11
2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner...... 2-14

2-1 Steps for Preparing to Use the NU-EP1
This section explains the steps for preparing to use the NU-EP1.
Flow from Installation to Communication Configuration
2 1. Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
Connecting the Sensor Amplifier (page 2-4)

Assigning the Sensor ID Number (page 3-4)
2. Wiring
Connecting the Communication Cable (page 2-6)
Power Supply (page 2-8)
3. Configuring the NU-EP1 Communication
IP address settings (page 2-11)
4. Configuring the Scanner Communication
Setting the IP address (page 2-14)
Registering the NU-EP1's device profile (page 2-14)
Setting the Scanner

(Refer to each scanner manual)
Communication is possible after completing the above settings.

When communicating with an Allen-Bradley PLC (EtherNet/IP scanner), refer to the
section "Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC"
(page 5-7) for an overview of the scanner settings.

2-2 Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers
This chapter provides the procedures for installing the NU-EP1 on a DIN rail and con-
necting sensor amplifiers.
Connectable Sensor Amplifiers and Quantities

Up to 16 N-bus compatible sensor amplifiers (expansion units) can be connected to
the NU-EP1. (N-bus is the name of the KEYENCE's wire-saving system.) Different
models can be connected as long as they are N-bus compatible sensor amplifiers.
2
Connectable sensor amplifiers

Number of
Part name Model
occupied IDs
Digital fiber sensor FS-N40/N42* 1
Digital fiber sensor (2-output) FS-N44* 2
Digital fiber sensor FS-N10 / N12* 1
Digital fiber sensor (2-output) FS-N14* 2
Digital laser sensor (0-line / connector type) LV-N10 / N12C* 1
Digital laser sensor (cable type) LV-N12* 2
Digital photoelectric sensor PS-N10 / N12* 1
Network compatible pressure sensor AP-N10 1
Network compatible pressure sensor (2-output) AP-N10D 2
Multi-Sensor Controller / All-Purpose Laser Sensor MU-N12 / LR-T* 3
Multi-Sensor Controller / Full-Spectrum Sensor MU-N12 / LR-W* 3
Multi-Sensor Controller / Clamp-on Flow Sensor MU-N12 / FD-Q* 3
Clamp-on Flow Sensor FD-XA2 2
Clamp-on Flow Sensor FD-XA2E 2
CMOS Laser Sensor (0-line) LR-XN10 1
CMOS Laser Sensor (cable type) LR-XN12* 2
e-CON 8-point Input Unit (NPN) NU-EN8N1) 8
1) Note that it is impossible to connect other sensors after the NU-EN8N.
Number of connectable units
The number of connectable units is determined by the total number of occupied ID
numbers. Multiple sensor amplifiers can be connected as long as the number of occu-
pied IDs does not exceed 16. If 17 or more ID numbers are occupied, the green N-bus
LED will flash *, and the red MS LED (module status indicator) will flash.
* If the NU-EN8N is installed, the green N-bus LED may not flash, even if the total
number of occupied IDs is more than 16.
Point Even if the number of occupied ID numbers does not exceed 16, the
number of connectable units may be restricted by conditions such
as the type of connected sensor amplifier or unit. (Example 1: When
connecting even one MU-N12 sensor amplifier, the number of con-
nectable sensor amplifiers is limited to four. Example 2: When all
the sensor amplifiers to connect are the FD-XA2/XA2E, the number
of connectable sensor amplifiers is limited to six.) For details, refer
to each sensor amplifier's specifications or the check the amount of
current which can be supplied from the NU-EP1 to the sensor
amplifier. ( "Specifications" (page 4-2))

Connecting the Sensor Amplifier
This section explains the methods for connecting the sensor amplifier expansion unit
to the NU-EP1.
2 NOTICE Turn off the power before connecting the NU-EP1 and sensor amplifiers.
1 Align the claw on the bottom of the NU-EP1 with the DIN rail. While push-
ing the amplifier in the direction of arrow (1), press down in the direction
of arrow (2).
(3)
(2)
(1)
Reference
To remove the NU-EP1, raise the amplifier in the direction of arrow
(3) while pushing the NU-EP1 in the direction of arrow (1).
2 Repeat step 1 to install additional sensor amplifiers or units on the DIN

rail and connect them to the NU-EP1.
If the sensor amplifier connector has an expansion protective cover, remove the
cover before connecting the amplifier.
NU-EP1
Expansion connector
Sensor amplifier
Point Ensure that the NU-EP1 and sensor amplifiers are connected
securely. If they are connected improperly or not inserted com-
pletely, they may be damaged when the power is turned on.

3 Mount the end units (OP-26751: a two-unit set shipped with the NU-EP1)
on both sides of the NU-EP1 and the sensor amplifier. Then, fix the end
units with the screws on the top of each end unit. (Tightening torque: 0.6
N•m or less)
Mount the end units in the same way as the NU-EP1.

2

End unit
End unit
Reference The power for each sensor amplifier is supplied from the NU-EP1.
-EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual - 2-5

2-3 Wiring
This section explains how to wire the NU-EP1.
NOTICE Always turn the power off before starting the wiring work.
2 Connecting the Communication Cable
Use the following procedures to connect the NU-EP1 to the communication cable
required for EtherNet/IP.
 Usable cables
The usable cable differs according to whether the system is structured with 10BASE-
T or 100BASE-TX.
Structuring a 10BASE-T system

STP/UTP cable
When structuring a 10BASE-T
system, use a Category 3 or
higher shielded twisted pair
(STP) cable or unshielded
twisted pair (UTP) cable.
Structuring a 100BASE-TX net-

work
When structuring a 100BASE-TX network, use a Category 5 or higher STP or UTP
cable. Do not use a Category 3 or Category 4 cable.
Point • Use an STP/UTP straight cable to connect the NU-EP1 to an Ether-

net switch.
• Use an STP/UTP cross cable when directly connecting the NU-EP1
to a personal computer.
• The STP/UTP cross cable is hard to identify from the STP/UTP
straight cable. Take care not to use the incorrect type.
• When connecting with the PoE (Power over Ethernet) function, use
an STP cable or a Category 5 or higher UTP cable.
• When structuring Ethernet with a method (10BASE-2, 10BASE-5,
etc.) other than 10BASE-T or 100BSE-TX, use a hub equipped with
an AUI (MAU) connector or BNC connector, or use a media conver-
tor (10BASE5  10BASE-T or 10BASE2  10BASE-T).

2-3 Wiring
 NU-EP1 connector port

The NU-EP1 connector port accepts an RJ-45 8-pole modular connector (ISO8877
compliant) used with 10BASE-T and 100BASE-TX, and complies with IEEE802.3
Standards.
Precautions for connecting a STP/UTP cable to the connector port

Make sure that a load is not applied on the connector port when connecting the STP/
UTP cable to the NU-EP1.
2
The cable may be bent when it is installed. If the cable is bent

NOTICE sharply, the wires in the cable may be damaged. Pay attention to the
cable's bending radius, R, when installing or routing the cable.
 Connecting the NU-EP1 to the EtherNet/IP switch

Use the following procedures to connect to the NU-EP1's RJ-45 connector port.
1 Turn the power off.
2 Connect the modular jack on one end of the STP/UTP cable to the
10BASE-T/100BASE port on the Ethernet switch being used.
Insert the jack until a "click" is heard. The modular jack and connector port will
lock.
Point • Keep the length of the STP/UTP cable to 100 m or less.

• Carefully check the state of connector (port) on the Ethernet switch
before connecting the NU-EP1. Some Ethernet switches have a dif-
ferent shape connector (AUI connector or BNC connector, etc.)
from RJ-45, while some have connectors used to connect Ethernet
switches together (cascade ports).
3 Connect the other modular jack of the STP/UTP cable to the NU-EP1 con-
nector port.
Insert the jack until a "click" is heard. The modular jack and connector port will
lock.

2-3 Wiring
Power Supply
This section explains the method for supplying power to the NU-EP1.
In addition to supplying power from the power connector, power can be supplied from
the Ethernet port using the PoE (Power over Ethernet) function.
2 • Always supply the power with one of the following methods. For
example, do not supply from a PoE power sourcing equipment
when supplying from a power supply connector. Supplying the

power simultaneously from the power supply connector and the
CAUTION
PoE power sourcing equipment could result in fire, electrical
shock or damage to the NU-EP1 or connected device.
• The marking on the power supply connector intends to warn
this instruction.
Reference The power to each sensor amplifier is supplied from the NU-EP1.
 Supplying power from the power terminal

 Usable cable
Copper wire, AWG12 to 24 (rated temperature 65 °C or higher)
Point The cable length should be 30 m or less.
 Trimming the cable

Strip the end of the cable as shown below.
10 mm
Point • If you use solderless terminals, perform cable wiring/trimming

appropriately to suit the specifications of the particular termi-
nals.
Recommended solderless terminals: Phoenix Contact's A/AI
Series.
• Do not perform soldering (pre-soldering) on the trimmed end of
the cable.

2-3 Wiring
 Connecting the cable
1 Connect the trimmed cable to the power supply connector.
Insert the cable completely.

2 Attach the power supply connector to the NU-EP1.
Plug the connector into the NU-EP1 and secure it with the screws on each end.
(Tightening torque: 0.2 to 0.3 N•m)

2-3 Wiring
 Using the PoE (Power over Ethernet) function

Power is supplied from the Ethernet port, so the power connector does not need to be
wired.
The PoE function is used to supply power to the NU-EP1 from a PoE compatible
Ethernet switch, etc., over an STP cable or a Category 5 or higher UTP cable.
2 KV-EP21V
Ver.2
TM
EtherNet/IP
When supplying power from a PoE function, the amount of current

which can be supplied to a connected sensor amplifier is limited as
shown below.
• Be sure that these limits are not exceeded when operating the
system.
Supplied voltage: 24V ±10 %
Supplied current: 50 to 55 °C: 140 mA
45 to 50 °C: 260 mA
-20 to 45 °C: 360 mA
• To ensure terminal protection, do not remove the power supply
NOTICE connector even when supplying the power from a PoE power
sourcing equipment.
• The unit must be connected with IEEE802.3af compatible PoE
power sourcing equipment. The PoE power sourcing equipment
in the following KEYENCE devices do not comply with
IEEE802.3af, so never connect these with PoE. There is a risk of
damage.
[DT-100A], [DT-500], [NE-V08]
• When connecting an amplifier (with cable) other than a zero-line
amplifier to the NU-EP1 and using the PoE power receiving func-
tion, contact your nearest KEYENCE office.

2-4 Configuring Communication with NU-EP1
Use the following configuration procedures for connecting the NU-EP1 to the Ether-
Net/IP system.
NU-EP1 Settings
The configuration of the NU-EP1 communication settings are explained below.
2
 IP address settings
The IP address is set after wiring the NU-EP1 and supplying the power.

By default, the IP address is not set. The NU-EP1 is equipped with a BOOTP client
function which allows the IP address to be set over Ethernet.
The IP address can be set by the following two methods.

• Use the IP address setting tool (download from the Keyence web site
www.keyence.com/global.jsp).
Refer to the following setting procedures or the "IP Setting Tool User's Manual".
• Use an IP address setting tool from another source.
Refer to the manual provided by the other source.
 Using the IP address setting tool

The procedures for using the IP address setting tool are explained briefly in this
section. Refer to the "IP Setting Tool User's Manual" for details on the usage
methods. The "IP Setting Tool User's Manual" can be viewed as a pdf file from the
[Help (H)] pull-down menu on the "IP Setting Tool" screen.
1 Start the IP Setting Tool.
Devices, such as the NU-EP1, connected to the network and for which the IP
address has not been set will appear.
Click the [Scan EtherNet/IP devices (A)] button to display the devices for which
the IP address is set.

Point The network status indicator (NS) must be off (IP address not
assigned) to display "Not Set" for the IP address. To un-assign an IP
address, hold down the NU-EP1's reset switch for three seconds or
longer.
2
2 Select the device for which the IP address is to be set, and click on [Setup
IP addr.(I)]. [Setup IP addr.] will open.
Set an IP address which is not currently used in "IP addr.(required)(I)", and click
on the [OK] button.
Reference
Open IP addresses can be searched for by using the [Search available IP
addresses (F)] button.

3 This completes the IP address setting.

Reference
What is BOOTP?
BOOTP is the abbreviation of BOOT strap Protocol, a protocol used by the
client device in the TCP/IP network to retrieve the network settings from the
server.
If there is a BOOTP server in the same network as the device running as a
BOOTP client, an IP address can be assigned to the device connected as
the BOOTP client.
BOOTP client BOOTP server
IP address assignment
Via Ethernet

2-5 Configuring Communication with the Scanner
This section explains the scanner configurations for connecting the NU-EP1 to the
EtherNet/IP system.
When communicating with an Allen-Bradley PLC (EtherNet/IP scanner), refer to the
"Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC" (page 5-
7) for additional details.
2 Setting the Scanner
The following settings are required when connecting the NU-EP1 to the EtherNet/IP
scanner.
 Setting the IP address

Set the scanner's IP address.
 Registering the NU-EP1's device profile

Register the device profile of the connected adaptor (NU-EP1) using the scanner's
setting software.
The device profile can be registered manually or by reading in the EDS (Electronic
Data Sheet) file. The NU-EP1's EDS file can be downloaded from the Keyence web
site (www.keyence.com/global.jsp).
 Configuring communication with the NU-EP1

The NU-EP1 communicates with the scanner using the EtherNet/IP cyclic communi-
cation and message communication.
 Cyclic communication (Implicit messaging)
This function sends and receives data at a set RPI (Requested Packet Interval).
When "connection" communication method is selected, communication can be exe-
cuted without a ladder program by assigning the devices to be sent and received on
the scanner side.
 Message communication (Explicit messaging)
This function is used to send and receive data which does not need to be punctual.
Use this method for EtherNet/IP communication when the sensor amplifier settings
have been changed, or when using a scanner which does not support cyclic com-
munication (e.g., Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series).
This function creates a message at the scanner side and communicates using a
ladder program.
For more information on setting each communication method, refer to "Cyclic

Communication" (page 3-6) and "Message Communication" (page 3-26) as well
as the manuals enclosed with each scanner.
Reference
This manual explains only the EtherNet/IP scanner functions and settings
required for communication with the NU-EP1. For details on the functions
and settings for the EtherNet/IP scanner or CPU unit, refer to the manuals
enclosed with the scanner or CPU unit.
Communication
This chapter explains the configuration of memory linked with the
EtherNet/IP unit, and the communication time chart. 3
3-1 What Is EtherNet/IP?.......................................... 3-2
3-2 NU-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function......3-3
3-3 Cyclic Communication........................................ 3-6
3-4 Message Communication......................................3-26
3-5 Parameter List........................................................3-37

3-1 What Is EtherNet/IP?
What Is EtherNet/IP?
EtherNet/IP is an industrial communication network with open specifications. The

specifications are managed by ODVA (Open DeviceNet Vendor Association, Inc.)
Industrial protocol has been combined with the Ethernet and standardized as Ether-
Net/IP (Industrial Protocol).
Communication is realized by combining the protocols known Common Industrial Pro-
tocol (CIP), TCP/IP and Ethernet. This allows regular Ethernet to be used together
3 with the network.
Before starting EtherNet/IP communication, one of the devices must open a commu-
Communication
nication line called a "connection" with the other device. The side which opens the
connection is called the "scanner", and the opened side is called the "adaptor". (The
NU-EP1 is an adaptor.)
EtherNet/IP includes cyclic communication (Implicit messaging) which sends and

receives data periodically and message communication (Explicit messaging) which
sends and receives commands and responses at a random timing.
With cyclic communication, RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set according to
the priority of the exchanged data, allowing the entire communication load to be
adjusted when exchanging data.
With message communication, the required commands and responses are
exchanged at the required timing. Message communication is used for applications
which do not require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as when reading
and writing adaptor settings.
Scanner
Low speed (Communication cycle: 1000 ms)

High speed
(Communication cycle: 10 ms)
Regular speed
(Communication cycle: 100 ms)
Adaptor Adaptor Adaptor
3-2 -EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

3-2 NU-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication Function
This section explains the EtherNet/IP functions supported by the NU-EP1.

The NU-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP adaptor, and supports both cyclic and mes-
sage EtherNet/IP communications.
Sensor amplifier
Output
EtherNet/IP scanner NU-EP1 Current value
Output Error information

Current value Operation mode
3
IN area Cyclic communication
Communication
Output Output
Error informationSetting value
Current value Current value
Operation modeCalibration
Error information
Error information Setting value
OUT area Cyclic communication
Operation modeCalibration
External input
IN area Message communication Setting value

Calibration
OUT area
Direct read/write of various parameters
 Cyclic communication
This function exchanges data between the scanner and the NU-EP1 at the set RPI
(Requested Packet Interval). Data such as the sensor amplifier's output signals and
judgment values and error status can be exchanged without ladder programs.
 Message communication
Message communication can be used for applications which do not require a punctu-
ality like cyclic communication.
Various parameters, including data which can be exchanged with cyclic communica-
tion, can be read and written. The sensor amplifier calibration function, etc., can also
be executed.

Assigning the Sensor ID Number
Multiple sensor amplifiers can be connected to the NU-EP1. ID numbers are assigned
to each sensor amplifier for identification.
The ID number is assigned in the following manner.

• ID numbers "ID: 0" to "ID: 16" can be assigned. (Up to 16 sensor amplifiers can be
connected.)
3 • ID numbers are assigned as ID number 0, ID number 1, ID number 2 and so forth

in order from the NU-EP1.
• Some sensor amplifier models occupy several ID numbers with one unit.
Communication
"Connectable Sensor Amplifiers and Quantities" (page 2-3)

An output, setting value, current value and external input are each assigned to one ID
number for cyclic communication. The data assignment differs according to the sen-
sor amplifier.

An example of each output ID number assignment when connecting a unit which

occupies more than one ID number is shown below.
Example)
ID number 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Unit occupying 8 ID numbers NU-EN8N Output 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
ID number 6
Unit occupying 1 ID numbers
d Output 1
Unit occupying 2 ID numbers

c
ID number
Output
4
1
5
2 3
Unit occupying 2 ID numbers ID number 2 3
b Output 1 2
Communication
ID number 1
Unit occupying 1 ID numbers a Output 1
ID number 0
NU-EP1 Output -
Output assigned to each ID number
ID number Output ID number Output

0 - (NU-EP1) 9 NU-EN8N output 3
1 a - Output 1 10 NU-EN8N output 4
2 b - Output 1 11 NU-EN8N output 5
3 b - Output 2 12 NU-EN8N output 6
4 c - Output 1 13 NU-EN8N output 7
5 c - Output 2 14 NU-EN8N output 8
6 d - Output 1
7 NU-EN8N output 1
8 NU-EN8N output 2
• The ID numbers are automatically assigned, so if the number of

connected sensor amplifiers or the order is changed, it may be
necessary to change the control program. In addition, some
units have restrictions to the connection order (must be con-
NOTIC nected last, etc.) This must be taken into consideration when
creating the control program.
• An error will occur if more than the maximum number of con-
nectable sensor amplifiers are connected.
"Error code list" (page 3-23)

3-3 Cyclic Communication
This section explains the cyclic communication function and its usage methods.
 What is cyclic communication?

This function exchanges data with the EtherNet/IP device in a cyclic manner (at a set cycle).
PLC EtherNet/IP scanner

KV-EP21V
3 Ver.2
Communication
TM
EtherNet/IP
RPI=10 (ms)*
RPI=5 (ms)*
RPI=3 (ms)* RPI=0.5 (ms)*

Ethernet
Various EtherNet/IP adaptors
* RPI (Requested Packet Interval) can be set individually for each connection.
Point The configurations such as RPI and data size for cyclic communica-
tion are set according to the scanner size.
In a network which has many connected devices, including EtherNet/
IP devices, a delay or packet loss could occur if a large load is con-
stantly or temporarily applied on the network. Verify the settings care-
fully before starting use.

With cyclic communication, one device opens a logical communication line called a
"connection" with the other device. When successfully opened, data is exchanged.
The side which opens the connection is called the "scanner", and the opened side is
called the "adaptor". (The NU-EP1 is an adaptor.)
Communication is started with the following procedures.
(1) The scanner requests the adaptor to open the connection.
(2) The compatibility is checked on the adaptor side.
(3) If there is no error in the compatibility, the connection is opened.
(* If an error is found during the compatibility check, the connection is not opened.)
"Checking the Device Compatibility" (page 3-25)
KV-EP21V
3
Communication
Ver.2
(1) Request connection open
(2) Check compatibility
(3) Open connection

TM
EtherNet/IP
The exchange of data between the EtherNet/IP scanner, NU-EP1 and each sensor
amplifier is shown below.
EtherNet/IP scanner NU-EP1 Sensor amplifier
Output data
IN area
Data reflected in the
scanner
Cyclic communication Data between
sensors is
refreshed
Input data
OUT area
The data output from the
Cyclic communication scanner is stored by the Data between
NU-EP1. sensors is
refreshed
Reference
To carry out EtherNet/IP communication between a scanner which does
not support cyclic communication (Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 Series, etc.),
communicate with the NU-EP1 using message communication.

Configuring Cyclic Communication
The following settings are required to execute cyclic communication with the NU-EP1.
[NU-EP1]
No settings are required for the NU-EP1.
[Scanner]
(1) Set the connection to be used.
3 (2) Set the devices used in cyclic communication.
Refer to the scanner manual for details on the settings.
(* A ladder program is not required when using cyclic communication.)
Communication

Usable Connections
The data communicated differs for each connection. Select the necessary connec-
tions.
The following connections can be used with the NU-EP1.
RPI
Connection Communication Input/ Assembly Size Application Reference
No. RANGE
Name data Output Instance (Byte)
(in 0.5 ms)
type page 3
Output,
Communication
current value, Input
64H
setting value NU-EP1 to 128 3-11
Monitor Data (100)
and operating scanner Exclusive
1 And External
status Owner
Input
Output
65H
External input Scanner to 4 3-17
(101)
NU-EP1
Output,
current value, Input
64H 0.5 ms to
setting value NU-EP1 to 128 3-11
Monitor (100) 10000 ms Input
and operating scanner
2 Data (Input
status Only
Only)
Output
FEH
- Scanner to 0 -
(254)
NU-EP1
Input
66H
Sensor Out- Sensor output NU-EP1 to
(102)
2 3-13
scanner Input
3 put (Input
Output Only
Only) FEH
- Scanner to 0 -
NU-EP1
(254)

Reference
• Each connection's trigger timing is executed cyclically. The connection
type supports both point-to-point and multicast.
• The details of each application type are explained below.
Exclusive Owner:
This connection allows data sent from the scanner to the NU-
EP1 and data sent from the NU-EP1 to the scanner to be set
simultaneously. This is set when the scanner not only monitors
the adaptor (NU-EP1) data, but also when it issues external
inputs and rewrites the settings, etc. Multiple "Exclusive Owner"
3 connections cannot be opened to one adaptor (NU-EP1).
Input Only:
Communication
This connection can only allow data sent from the NU-EP1 to the
scanner. This is set when the scanner only monitors the adaptor
(NU-EP1) data. Multiple scanners can open an "Input Only" con-
nection simultaneously to one adaptor (NU-EP1).
* When simultaneously opening connections from multiple
scanners, set the Connection Type to Multicast.
• Designate "1" for the instance ID of "Assembly Object", and "0" for the
size when using the respective PLC which requires the designation of
"Configuration".

Assignment to IN Area (NU-EP1 to Scanner)
The data from the NU-EP1 is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's IN area.
Reference
If the data extends over multiple byte, such as 16-bit data, the data is
stored into an area which starts with an even address in order from the low-
order byte.
Example)
High-order byte Low-order byte

KV-EP21V
3
16-bit data
12H 34H
Communication
Ver.2
Address 20 to 21
16-bit data 23 22 21 20
Address 22 to 23 56H 78H 56H 78H 12H 34H
TM
EtherNet/IP
 Monitor Data (64-word/128-byte) Assembly Instance: 64H (100)

"Assigning the Sensor ID Number" (page 3-4)
Name Address bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(Byte)
0 Reserved for system NU-EP1

Error Status
Status Sensor
Warning Sensor Reserved Sensor Sensor
1 Error Status for Setting External EEPROM Updating Sensor
Status Ready Input Setting
system Error Busy
Busy
Error Error
Sensor 2 •••••
(ID number 8) (ID number 1)
Error
Status 3 Error ••••• Error
Warning Warning
Sensor 4 (ID number 8) ••••• (ID number 1)
Warning
Status Warning Warning
5 •••••
L-on/D-on L-on/D-on
6 (N.O./N.C.) ••••• (N.O./N.C.)
L-on/D-on (ID number 8) (ID number 1)
(N.O./
N.C.) L-on/D-on L-on/D-on
7 (N.O./N.C.) ••••• (N.O./N.C.)
Current Value Current Value
Current 8 Over Range ••••• Over Range
Value (ID number 8) (ID number 1)
Over Current Value Current Value
Range 9 Over Range ••••• Over Range

Address
Name (Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0

Current 10 Under Range ••••• Under Range
Value (ID number 8) (ID number 1)
Under Current Value Current Value
Range 11 Under Range ••••• Under Range
12 Invalid ••••• Invalid
Current (ID number 8) (ID number 1)
Value
3 Invalid
13 Invalid
(ID number 16)
••••• Invalid
(ID number 9)
Output Output
14 •••••
Communication
Output*1
Output Output
15 •••••
Reserved 16 to 17 Reserved for system
for system
External Input External Input
18 Response ••••• Response
External (ID number 8) (ID number 1)
Input
Response External Input External Input
19 Response ••••• Response
Error ID 20
Current Error ID Number. (16-bit unsigned integer)
Number 21
Error 22
Current Error Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
Code 23
Warning 24
Current Warning ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
ID Number 25
Warning 26
Current Warning Code (16-bit unsigned integer)
Code 27
Setting 28
Error ID Setting Error ID Number (16-bit unsigned integer)
Number 29
30
Current Value (ID number 1) (16-bit signed/unsigned integer)
31
Current
: :
Value*1
60
Current Value (ID number 16) (16-bit signed/unsigned integer)
61
62
Setting Value 1 (ID number 1) (16-bit signed/unsigned integer)
63
Setting
: :
Value 1*1
92
93

Address
Name (Byte) bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
94
95
Setting
: :
Value 2*1
124
125
Reserved 126 to
for system 127 Reserved for system
 Fast Output (1-word/2-byte) Assembly Instance: 66H (102) 3

Communication
Address
Name bit7 bit6 bit5 bit4 bit3 bit2 bit1 bit0
(Byte)
Fast Output Fast Output
0 •••••
Fast Out- (ID number 8) (ID number 1)
put*1 Fast Output Fast Output
1 •••••
*1 To confirm the data assigned to "Output (Fast output)", "Current Value", "Setting
Value 1/2" "Cyclic communication data assignment" (page 3-18)
What is Fast Output?

Data between the NU-EP1 and the sensor amplifier is exchanged at a set cycle, but
when the number of connected amplifiers increases, the exchanged volume also
increases and the communication cycle becomes longer. In the following two connec-
tions, if the communication cycle becomes longer, a delay is generated when retriev-
ing the sensor amplifier data into the PLC.
• "Monitor Data And External Input"
• "Monitor Data (Input Only)"
As a measure, the NU-EP1 uses a separate dedicated cable to directly retrieve the
sensor output signals, and can recognize the data output from the sensor within a
delay time of 50 µs. The output signal, which is directly imported, is called a "high-
speed output". This "Fast output" is handled in the "Sensor Output (Input Only)" con-
nection.
By using EtherNet/IP communication for the "Fast output", the sensor's output signals
can be imported to the PLC with minimum delay time.
For actual communication times, refer to "4-2 Data Processing Time".

Parameter list
Item Description
Outputs the NU-EP1's error status.
NU-EP1 Error
 ON: Error is occurring.
Status
 OFF: Error is not occurring.
When the settings have been changed with communication or key operations, this
Updating Sensor is output until the sensor amplifier settings have been changed.
Setting  ON: One sensor amplifier has outdated settings.
 OFF: All sensor amplifier settings are current.
When the sensor amplifier settings have been changed, this is output until writing to
3 Sensor EEPROM
Busy
the EEPROM is completed.
 ON: One sensor amplifier has setting data which has not been written to the EEPROM.
 OFF: The setting data for all sensor amplifiers has been written to the EEPROM.
This is output when an external input signal is sent. If the external input signal is
Communication
Sensor External activated, the external input cannot be set via communication.
Input Busy  ON: The external input signal is activated.
 OFF: The external input signal is not activated.
This is output when there is an incorrect combination in the sensor amplifier set-
tings. The ID number which caused the sensor setting error can be confirmed by
Sensor Setting
the "Setting Error ID Number".
Error
 ON: There is an incorrect setting combination in one of the sensor amplifiers.
 OFF: All sensor amplifiers are running with the correct settings.
This is output when the sensor amplifier is running normally.
Sensor Ready  ON: The sensor amplifier is running normally.
 OFF: The sensor amplifier is starting up.
The warning status for the NU-EP1 or connected sensor amplifiers is output.
When ON, a value is stored in "Warning ID Number" and "Warning Code", and
Warning Status when OFF, 0 is stored in "Warning ID Number" and "Warning Code".
 ON: A warning is occurring in the NU-EP1 or a sensor amplifier.
 OFF: A warning is not occurring in the NU-EP1 or any sensor amplifier.
The error status for the NU-EP1 or connected sensor amplifiers is output. When
ON, a value is stored in "Error ID Number" and "Error Code", and when OFF, 0 is
Error Status stored in the "Error ID Number" and "Error Code".
 ON: An error is occurring in the NU-EP1 or a sensor amplifier.
 OFF: An error is not occurring in the NU-EP1 or any sensor amplifier.
The target ID number bit is output when an error is occurring in the sensor amplifier.*1
Sensor Error
 ON: An error is occurring in the target ID number sensor amplifier.
Status
 OFF: An error is not occurring in the target ID number sensor amplifier.
The target ID number bit is output when a warning is occurring in the sensor amplifier.*1
Sensor Warning
 ON: A warning is occurring in the target ID number sensor amplifier.
Status
 OFF: A warning is not occurring in the target ID number sensor amplifier.
L-on/D-on The L-on/D-on or N.O./N.C. state of the sensor amplifier is output.*1, *2, *3
(N.O./N.C.)  ON: The target ID number sensor amplifier is in the D-on or N.C. state.
 OFF: The target ID number sensor amplifier is in the L-on or N.O. state.
This is output when the sensor amplifier's current value is larger than the measure-
ment upper limit.*1, *2, *3, *4
Current Value  ON: The target ID number sensor amplifier's current value is larger than the
Over Range measurement upper limit.
 OFF: The target ID number sensor amplifier's current value is less than the
measurement upper limit.

Item Description
This is output when the sensor amplifier's current value is less than the measure-
ment lower limit.*1, *2, *3, *4
Current Value  ON: The target ID number sensor amplifier's current value is less than the mea-
Under Range surement lower limit.
 OFF: The target ID number sensor amplifier's current value is larger than the
measurement lower limit.
Current Value This is output when the sensor amplifier's current value is invalid.*1, *2, *3, *4
Invalid  ON: The target ID number sensor amplifier's current value is not normal.
 OFF: The target ID number sensor amplifier's current value is normal.
Output
The sensor amplifier's ON/OFF state is output.*5, *6
 ON: The sensor amplifier output is on. 3
 OFF: The sensor amplifier output is off.
"Cyclic communication data assignment" (page 3-18)
Communication
This is output when an external input has been made via communication. The ID
number is output even if it does not have an external input.*3
External Input  ON: The external input request turned ON.
Response  OFF: The external input request turned OFF.
Refer to "External Input Request" (page 3-17) for details.
If the "Error Status" is ON, the ID number of the NU-EP1 or the sensor amplifier
connected to the NU-EP1 in which the error is occurring is displayed. (ID number 0
for NU-EP1.) 0 is stored if an error is not occurring. If an error is occurring at multi-
ple IDs, the ID number of the NU-EP1 or sensor amplifier with the highest priority
error is stored.
Error ID Number Error priority:
(1) NU-EP1 error (Excluding error code 56)
(2) Sensor amplifier error (Smallest error code number has priority)*
* If the same error code is occurring in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the priority.
(3) NU-EP1 error (Error code 56)
If the "Error Status" is ON, the error code is stored. 0 is stored if an error is not
occurring. If an error is occurring at multiple IDs, the error code of the NU-EP1 or
sensor amplifier with the highest priority error is stored.
Error priority:
(1) NU-EP1 error (Excluding error code 56)
Error Code
(2) Sensor amplifier error (Smallest error code number has priority)*
* If the same error code is occurring in multiple sensor amplifiers, the error
with the smallest ID number has the priority.
(3) NU-EP1 error (Error code 56)
If the "Warning Status" is ON, the ID number of the NU-EP1 or the sensor amplifier
Warning ID connected to the NU-EP1 in which the warning is occurring is displayed. 0 is
Number stored if a warning is not occurring. If a warning is occurring at multiple IDs, the
smallest ID number is stored. (Priority: 00 > 01 > to > 16)
If the "Warning Status" is ON, the warning code is stored. 0 is stored if "Warning
Status" is OFF. If a warning is occurring at multiple ID numbers, the warning code
Warning Code with the smallest ID number is stored. (Priority: 00 > 01 > to > 16)
"Warning list" (page 3-25)
If the "Sensor Setting Error" is ON, the ID number of the sensor amplifier in which
the sensor setting error is occurring is stored. 0 is stored if a setting sensor error is
Setting Error ID not occurring. If an error is occurring at multiple IDs, the smallest ID number is
Number stored. (Priority: 00 > 01 > to > 16)
"Functions which Cannot be Set in Duplicate" (page 3-25)

Item Description
This is the sensor amplifier's current value. 0 is stored if there is no current value.
Current Value
This is the sensor amplifier setting value 1 data.
Setting Value 1 0 is stored if setting value 1 does not exist.
This is the sensor amplifier setting value 2 data.
Setting Value 2 0 is stored if setting value 2 does not exist.
3 Fast Output
The sensor amplifier's ON/OFF status is output.
 ON: The sensor amplifier output is on.
 OFF: The sensor amplifier output is off.
Communication
*1 If the sensor occupies more than two ID numbers, the status is output to all occu-
pied ID numbers.
*2 The status is not output to an ID number for which each item does not exist.
*3 When using the NU-EN8N sensor amplifier, the status is not output to the occu-
pied ID number.
*4 For details, refer to "Current Value Property of the Sensor" (page 4-11).
*5 The output can be switched between "Fast output" and "Current Value Sync. Out-
put".
Change the NU object attribute B3H. (The instance ID is 00H.)
"What is Fast Output?" (page 3-13)
*6 With the NU-EN8N, the output is only sent when the output is set to "Fast output".

Assignment to OUT Area (Scanner to NU-EP1)
The data to the sensor amplifier is assigned to the EtherNet/IP scanner's OUT area.
 External Input (2-word/4-byte) Assembly Instance: 65H (101)

Address
Name Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
(Byte)
0
External Input
Request •••••
External Input
Request
3
External (ID number 8) (ID number 1)
Communication
Input
Request External Input External Input
1 Request ••••• Request
Reserved
2 to 3 Reserved for system
for system
Parameter list
Item Description
The sensor amplifier's external input is activated via communica-
tion. If a signal is input on the external input terminal, the external
input request will be ignored.
External Input
 ON: External input is activated via communication. "External
Request
Input Response" turns ON when input is accepted.
 OFF: "External Input Response" turns OFF.
External Input Request

The procedures and time chart for executing external input with cyclic communication
is shown below.
Example) Executing external input to ID numbers 1 and 3 sensors

P LC External Input Request
OUT area: Address 0 00H 05H 00H
External Input Response

IN area: Address18 00H 05H 00H
ON
Sensor External input OFF
Reference
The external inputs can be executed simultaneously to multiple sensor
amplifiers.

Cyclic communication data assignment
For NU-EP1, data such as the sensor "output" and "current value" can be obtained via
data communication, but the meaning of "output" and "current value" differs according
to the sensor.
For details, refer to the table below.
 Output (Fast output)
3 Connected sensor
1st 2nd
ID number
3rd ••• 8th
FS-N40/N42* Output - - ••• -
Communication
FS-N44* Output 1 Output 2 - ••• -

FS-N10/N12* Output - - ••• -
FS-N14* Output 1 Output 2 - ••• -
LV-N10/N12C* Output - - ••• -
LV-N12* Output 1 Output 2 - ••• -
PS-N10/N12* Output - - ••• -
AP-N10 Output 1 - - ••• -
AP-N10D Output 1 Output 2 - ••• -
MU-N/LR-T Output 1 Output 2 Not used ••• -
1-Output Output of the
Output 2 Not used ••• -
16-Bank selected bank
MU-N/
4-Output Output 1 of the Output 2 of the Output 3 of the
LR-W ••• -
2-Bank selected bank selected bank selected bank
Binary Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 ••• -
MU-N/FD-Q Output 1 Output 2 Not used ••• -
FD-XA2 Output 1 Output 2 - ••• -
FD-XA2E Output 1 Output 2 - ••• -
LR-XN10 Output - - ••• -
LR-XN12* Output 1 Output 2 - ••• -
NU-EN8N Output 1 Output 2 Output 3 ••• Output 8

 Current Value
ID number
Connected sensor
1st 2nd 3rd ••• 8th
FS-N40/N42*1 Current value - - ••• -
FS-N44*1 Current value Not used - ••• -
FS-N10/N12*1 Current value - - ••• -
FS-N14*1 Current value Not used - ••• -
LV-N10/N12C*1 Current value - - ••• -
LV-N12*1 Current value Not used - ••• -
PS-N10/N12*1 Current value - - ••• - 3
AP-N10 Current Pressure Value - - ••• -
AP-N10D Current Pressure Value Raw Pressure Value - ••• -
Communication
MU-N/LR-T Current Distance Not used Not used ••• -
1-Output Current value of
Not used Not used ••• -
16-Bank the selected bank
Current value of Current value of Current value of
4-Output
MU-N/ output 1 of the output 2 of the output 3 of the ••• -
2-Bank
LR-W selected bank selected bank selected bank
Number of the out- Current value of
Binary put with the high- the selected out- Not used ••• -
est matching rate put number
MU-N/FD-Q Instantaneous flow Integrated flow Not used ••• -
Integrated flow/
FD-XA2 Instantaneous flow - ••• -
Shot amount*1
FD-XA2E Instantaneous flow Not used - ••• -
LR-XN10*2 0 - - ••• -
LR-XN12**2 0 0 - ••• -
NU-EN8N Not used Not used Not used ••• Not used
*1 "Integrated flow" when "Shot mode" is not selected, "Shot value" when "Shot
mode" is selected
*2 Current value is always fixed to 0.

 External Input
ID number
Connected sensor
FS-N40/N42* External input - - ••• -
FS-N44* External input Not used - ••• -
FS-N10/N12* External Input - - ••• -
FS-N14* External Input Not used - ••• -
LV-N10/N12C* External Input - - ••• -
LV-N12* External Input Not used - ••• -
PS-N10/N12* External Input - - ••• -
3 AP-N10
AP-N10D
External Input
External Input
-
Not used
-
-
•••
•••
-
-
MU-N/LR-T External Input Not used Not used ••• -
Communication
1-Output
External Input Not used Not used ••• -
16-Bank
MU-N/
4-Output
LR-W External Input Not used Not used ••• -
2-Bank
Binary External Input Not used Not used ••• -
MU-N/FD-Q External Input Not used Not used ••• -
FD-XA2 External input External input - ••• -
FD-XA2E External input Not used - ••• -
LR-XN10 External input - - ••• -
LR-XN12* External input Not used - ••• -
NU-EN8N Not used Not used Not used ••• Not used

 Setting Value 1
ID number
Connected sensor
Setting value
FS-N40/N42* - - ••• -
(Output / Area Hi)
Setting value Setting value
FS-N44* - ••• -
(Output 1 / Area Hi) (Output 2)
Setting Value
FS-N10/N12* - - ••• -
(Output / Area Hi)
Setting Value Setting Value
FS-N14* - ••• -
LV-N10/N12C*
(Output 1 / Area Hi)
Setting Value
(Output / Area Hi)
(Output 2)
- - ••• -
3
Setting Value Setting Value (Output 2
Communication
LV-N12* - ••• -
(Output 1 / Area Hi) / Counter Setting Value)
Setting Value
PS-N10/N12* - - ••• -
(Output / Area Hi)
AP-N10 Setting Value (P1) - - ••• -
AP-N10D Setting Value (P1) Setting Value (P2) - ••• -
Setting Value (Output1 Setting Value (Output2
MU-N/LR-T Not used ••• -
/ Output1 Area Near) / Output2 Area Near)
1-Output Bank 1 setting Bank 2 setting Bank 3 setting
••• -
16-Bank value value value
MU-N/
4-Output Bank 1, Output 1 Bank 1, Output 2 Bank 1, Output 3
LR-W ••• -
2-Bank Setting value Setting value Setting value
Binary Output 1 Setting value Output 2 Setting value Output 3 Setting value ••• -
Setting Value (Output1 Setting Value (Output2
MU-N/FD-Q Not used ••• -
/ Output1 Area Lower) / Output2 Area Lower)
Instantaneous Flow Shot amount Setting
FD-XA2 Setting Value (Output1 Value (Output1 Area - ••• -
/ Output1 Area Lower) Lower)
Setting value
FD-XA2E Not used - ••• -
(Output)
Setting Value
LR-XN10 - - ••• -
(Output / Area High)
LR-XN12* - ••• -
(Output1/Area High) (Output2/Area High)
NU-EN8N - - - ••• -

 Setting Value 2
ID number
Connected sensor
FS-N40/N42* Setting value (Area Low) - - ••• -
FS-N44* Setting value (Area Low) Not used - ••• -
FS-N10/N12* Setting Value (Area Low) - - ••• -
FS-N14* Setting Value (Area Low) Not used - ••• -
LV-N10/N12C* Setting Value (Area Low) - - ••• -
LV-N12* Setting Value (Area Low) Not used - ••• -
PS-N10/N12* Setting Value (Area Low) - - ••• -
3 AP-N10 Not used
Setting Value
-
Setting Value
- ••• -
AP-N10D - ••• -
(Area Upper: Hi) (Area Low: Lo)
Communication

MU-N/LR-T Not used ••• -
(Output1 Area Far) (Output2 Area Far)
1-Output Bank 4 setting Bank 5 setting Bank 6 setting
••• -
16-Bank value value value
MU-N/
4-Output Bank 1, Output 4 Bank 2, Output 1 Bank 2, Output 2
LR-W ••• -
2-Bank Setting value Setting value Setting value
Binary Output 4 Setting value Output 5 Setting value Output 6 Setting value ••• -
Setting Value (Out- Setting Value (Out-
MU-N/FD-Q Not used ••• -
put1 Area Upper) put2 Area Upper)
Instantaneous Flow Shot amount Setting
FD-XA2 Setting Value Value - ••• -
(Output1 Area Upper) (Output1 Area Upper)
FD-XA2E Not used Not used - ••• -
Setting Value
LR-XN10 - - ••• -
(Area Low)
LR-XN12* - ••• -
(Output1 Area Low) (Output2 Area Low)
NU-EN8N - - - ••• -

 Error code list

The following error codes may occur with the NU-EP1 and sensor amplifier.
Error ID
Code Details Cause Actions
number
0 No error
51 System error Sensor ID assignment error
A sensor was disconnected
Confirm that the NU-EP1 is
Number of sen- during use. Only the NU-EP1
53 securely connected to the
sors down was reset. Data is being read
sensor. Turn the power on
from sensor.
again.
54
Number of sen-
sors down
A sensor was disconnected
during use.
3
A sensor was connected
Communication
securely connected to the
Number of sen- during operation. Sensors for
56 sensor. Make sure that sen-
sors up more than 17 outputs were
sors for 16 outputs or less
connected.
are connected.
Constant operation communi- securely connected to the
57 System error
0 cation error sensor. Turn the power on
again.
Check the IP address and
IP address dupli- The IP address is the same change it so it is not dupli-
70
cate error as another device. cated. Then, turn the power
on again.
100 System error An IP setting error occurred.
A default gateway setting
101 System error
error occurred.
102 System error An EEPROM error occurred.
103 System error Protocol stack start error Contact your nearest
Keyence office.
104 System error Flash ROM hardware error
150 System error Number of held IDs error
151 System error Number of sensor units error
152 System error Initial read error
• Check whether the load
An overcurrent was detected through the resistance value is too low.
1
control output. () • Check whether the wire is
shortcircuited.
Check the following matters
and turn the power OFF and
(FS-N40/N10 Series) ON.
Does not occur. • Check that the sensor
1-16
head is connected.
(Sensor) 2
(Models other than FS-N40/N10 Series) • Check that the sensor
Signals from the sensor head are not conveyed head cable is not broken.
properly. () • Securely crimp the head
cable connector with a
pair of pliers, etc.
Cycle power. If operation is
3 The internal data write/read failed. not recovered, initialize the
settings.

Error ID
Code Details Cause Actions
number
Set the flow direction
according to the fluid flow
(FD-Q/FD-X Series)
direction. For details, see the
Counter flow happens.
instruction manual of the
sensor.
5
If you cannot fix the problem
(LR-X Series)
by restarting the product, the
A laser diode error has occurred.
product must be replaced.
(Other Series)
-
3 Does not occur.
(FS-N40/N10/LV-N10/PS-N10 Series)
• Check whether the
received light amount has
The DATUM warning output turned ON while using
dropped.
Communication
the DATUM function.

• Adjust the DATUM warn-
• The received light amount is less than the
ing output level.
DATUM warning output level.
• Adjust the raw received
• The raw received light amount value is 50 or
light amount to be 50 or
less
6 more.
Check items such as the
1-16 installation, piping, and fluid
(FD-Q/FD-X Series)
(Sensor) status according to the
Sensor cannot receive detection signal.
instruction manual of the
sensor.
(Other Series)
-
Does not occur.
• Set the APC function to
(FS-N40/N10 Series) OFF.
The LED light amount drop exceeds the APC com- • Replace the sensor if
pensation limit. advanced detection (APC
function) is required.
7 (LV-N10/PS-N10/AP-N10/FD-X/LR-X Series)
-
No error occurred.
Refer to the sensor User's
(LR-T/LR-W/FD-Q Series)
manual and complete the ini-
The settings do not match between the sensor and
tial setting (synchronization
MU-N.
of the sensor and MU-N).
Check the connection
A communication error has occurred between this between this device and the
8
device and the sensor. sensor amplifier, and then
restart the device.

 Warning list
There are no warnings which occur with the NU-EP1.
The following warnings may occur with the sensor.
 Type of warning
Sensor Warning occurrence condition

FS-N40 Series Alarm is ON when “Limit Detection” is used.
FS-N14*
Alarm is ON when “Limit setting detection function” is used.
LV-N10 Series
FD-X Series Alarm is ON when “Bubble alert” is used.
LR-X Series Misalignment has been detected or “Waiting for Calibration”. 3
Other models No warning occurs.
Communication
Refer to each sensor amplifier's manual for details on the Limit Detection function.
 Procedures to confirm the warning
Read "Sensor Warning Status" (page 3-11) which is assigned to the cyclic com-
munication's IN area.
 Functions which Cannot be Set in Duplicate

Some functions of the sensor amplifier cannot be set in duplicate. For the details, refer
to "Functions which Cannot be Set in Duplicate" (page 5-35).
Checking the Device Compatibility
The compatibility check is a function executed when the sensor communicates with
the NU-EP1. This function checks that the device set with the scanner matches the
NU-EP1 to prevent communicating with the wrong device. This function is executed at
the moment the connection is opened.
Refer to the respective scanner manual for details on using the scanner.

3-4 Message Communication
This section explains the message communication function and usage methods.
 What is message communication (Explicit messaging)?

Message communication is a function which communicates by issuing commands at
a random timing using the objects and services (Service Codes) prepared for each
EtherNet/IP device. Message communication is used for applications which do not
require the punctuality of cyclic communication, such as when reading and writing
adaptor settings.
The objects and service codes which can be used with message communication
3 include those which are specified as a standard and those which are unique to the
device. Using the objects and services unique to the NU-EP1, data can be monitored,
parameters can be read and written, and operations such as reset can be executed.
Communication
Scanner NU-EP1 Sensor amplifier
(1) Message communication command

Send Send
(2) Interpret and
execute command
Receive Receive
(3) Message communication response
Reference
The NU-EP1 message communication function supports CIP defined
UCMM (unconnected) and Class 3 (connected) message communication.

Configuring Message Communication
The following settings are required to execute message communication with the NU-
EP1.
[NU-EP1]
No settings are required for the NU-EP1.
[Scanner]
Set the applicable service, Class ID, Instance ID, Attribute ID and service data, and
send the command used for message communication.
3
"Objects and Services" (page 3-28)
Communication
Refer to the scanner manual for details on the setting methods and applicable
commands.

Objects and Services
With message communication, data is exchanged using objects and services.
When (1) a service is executed to an NU-EP1 object, actions such as (2) data output,
(3) parameter changes or (4) designated operation execution are performed.
NU-EP1 or sensor amplifier connected to NU-EP1
3 Service
(1)
Object
(3)
Parameter change
Communication
(2) (4) Operation

Data output command execution
For example with the NU Object, one instance is prepared for each sensor amplifier
connected to the NU-EP1. By reading the attributes which correspond to each
instance's current incoming light amount value, the current incoming light amount
value for each sensor amplifier corresponding to that instance can be read out.
NU Object
(Class ID: 66H)
NU-EP1 ID number 1 sensor ID number 2 sensor

Attribute
Instance ID: 00H Instance ID: 01H Instance ID: 01H
ID: 0324H Output

ID: 0325H Current value
ID: 0326H Reserved for system)
Reference
With the EtherNet/IP (CIP), a method called "object modeling" is used to
express the device. The device is handled as a group of objects. Objects
abstractly express the configuration elements in the device. The class is a
group of objects for expressing the same type of configuration elements.
An instance actually expresses a specific object contained in a class. Each
instance in the class has the same attribute group, but each uses a unique
attribute value.

Reference
To execute a service to the NU-EP1, send a command from the scanner.
The NU-EP1 then returns the service execution results as a response.
Commands require a service, class ID, instance ID, attribute ID *, and set-
ting value (service data)* when writing parameters.
Command Response
Service General Status

Class ID Additional Status*
Instance ID Service response data* 3
Attribute ID *
Communication
Service data*
* May be unnecessary, depending on the command being used.

"Basic Format for Message Communication and Flow of Process"
(page 3-30)
Objects Usable with NU-EP1
A list of objects which can be used with the NU-EP1 is provided in this section.
EtherNet/IP unit
KV-EP21V
NU Identity Assembly
Command Object Object Object
Ver.2
Message Connection TCP/IP Ethernet

Response Router Manager Interface Link
Object Object Object Object
TM
EtherNet/IP
Reference
Object name Class ID Description
page
This object provides the status of the NU-EP1 or sen-
sor amplifier connected to the NU-EP1, and writes/
NU Object 66H 3-32
reads the parameters. This object is unique to the NU-
EP1.
This object provides the identification information,
Identity Object 01H 5-19
general information and reset service.
Message Router This object provides the connection point for message
02H 5-22
Object communication.
This object provides access to the devices exchanged
Assembly Object 04H with cyclic communication. Data cannot be sent to a 5-23
device which does not support cyclic communication.
Connection This object is used for connection type communica-
06H 5-25
Manager Object tion.

Reference
Object name Class ID Description
page
This object provides the structure for setting the TCP/
TCP/IP Interface
F5H IP network interface. The IP address, subnet mask 5-27
Object
and gateway, etc., can be set.
Ethernet Link Object F6H This object provides the Ethernet status information. 5-31
Basic Format for Message Communication and Flow of Process
3 The EtherNet/IP scanner and NU-EP1 communicate by exchanging Explicit mes-

sages. The following section gives a basic example of the command format of sent
Explicit messages and the response format returned from the NU-EP1 to the scanner.
Communication
 Commands
• Command format
Item Description
*1
Service code Designates the service code to be used.
Class ID Designates the class ID according to the service*1 being used.
Instance ID Designates the instance ID according to the service*1 being used.
Attribute ID Designates the attribute ID according to the service*1 being used.
Service data Designates the service according to the service*1 being used.
*1 Refer to "How to Use NU Objects" (page 3-32) or "Objects for Use with
the NU-EP1" (page 5-18) for details on the usable services.
 Responses
• Response format
Item Description
Returns a general status in respect to the command. 00H is returned when
General status
normal.
Additional status Returns the additional status.
Service response
Returns the service response data in respect to the command.
data

 Command processing order and error response

Check whether each ID is within the supported range with the following process.
Class ID check Path Destination Unknown (05H)

returned as general status
No
Yes
Instance ID check Path Destination Unknown (05H)

No
Yes
3
Service not Supported (08H)
Service check
Communication
No
Yes
Attribute not Supported (14H)

Attribute ID check
No
Yes
Executes supported service process
 Supplement for object processing

• Get_Attribute_Single and Get_Attributes_All are executed regardless of the
send service data.
• If the service (Get_Attributes_All, Reset) does not designate an attribute ID, the
Attribute ID is ignored when executing the service.
• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for an attribute which cannot be written
(Set), "0EH" (Attribute not settable) is returned to the general status.
• If Set_Attribute_Single is designated for a writeable attribute and the writing size
is less than the attribute size, the general status "13H" (Not enough data) will be
returned. If the writing size is larger than the attribute size, the excessive data is
ignored when executing the service.

How to Use NU Objects
This section explains how to carry out message communication using NU Objects.
(1) Reading data from sensor amplifier

Each parameter is read from the NU-EP1 or a sensor amplifier connected to the
NU-EP1.
3  Command format
Refer to "Parameter List" (page 3-37) and designate the instance ID / attribute ID
according to the data to be read.
Communication
Item Value
Service code (HEX) 0EH (Get Attribute Single)
Class ID (HEX) 66H
00 : NU
Instance ID (DEC) 01 to 16 : Sensor ID number
Attribute ID (HEX) "Parameter List" (page 3-37)
Service data -
 Response format
Item Value
General status (HEX) "General status" (page 3-36)

Service response data -

(2) Writing data to sensor amplifier

Parameters are written to the NU-EP1 or a sensor amplifier connected to the NU-EP1.
 Command format
Refer to "Parameter List" (page 3-37) and designate the instance ID / attribute ID /
service according to the data to be written.
Item Value
Service code (HEX) 10H (Set Attribute Single)
Class ID (HEX) 66H
00 : NU
3
Instance ID (DEC) 01 to 16 : Sensor ID number
Communication
Service data "Parameter List" (page 3-37)
 Response format
Item Value


(3) Issuing operation command to sensor amplifier

An operation command, such as sensitivity calibration, is issued to a sensor amplifier
connected to the NU-EP1.
 Command format
Refer to "Attribute IDs corresponding to operation commands" of "Parameter List"
(page 3-37) and designate the instance ID / attribute ID.
Item Value
3 Service code (HEX)

Class ID (HEX)
4BH
66H
01 to 16 :Sensor ID number
Instance ID (DEC)
Communication

Service data -
 Response format
Item Value


(4) Locking to disable sensor amplifier operations

A batch key lock is applied to the sensor amplifiers connected to the NU-EP1.
 Command format
Refer to the following chart and designate the parameter.
Item Value
Service code (HEX) 4CH
Class ID (HEX) 66H
Instance ID (DEC)
Attribute ID (HEX)
00 : NU
-
3
00H : Key lock cancel
Communication
01H : Key lock execute
Service data
02H : PIN key lock execute
03H : Communication key lock execute
Reference
PIN key lock: The PIN set in thesensor amplifier is required to cancel this
setting from the sensor amplifier.
Communication key lock: This cannot be canceled from the sensor ampli-
fier.
 Response format
Item Value


 General status
The responses made when using each service are shown below.
(1) Parameter read: Service code 0EH
(2) Parameter write: Service code 10H
(3) Operation command: Service code 4BH
(4) Batch lock setting: Service code 4CH
General Command type

Details
status (1) (2) (3) (4)
00H     Normal end
3 05H     Instance ID is out of range.
This service is not supported by designated ID, or cannot be
08H - -  
executed.
Communication
09H -  -  Written data is out of range.

Execution of operation command failed. Check that sensor
0CH - -  -
amplifier can execute operation command.
0EH -  - - Writing was attempted to unwriteable attribute ID.
10H    - System is starting up. Try again.
13H  -  Service data size is less than specified.
14H    - Attribute ID is out of range.
Sensor amplifier corresponding to designated instance ID is
16H    -
not connected.
This service is supported with designated instance ID but can-
1FH    - not be used with designated attribute ID. C350H is stored in
additional status.
FEH     System error. Contact your nearest Keyence office.

3-5 Parameter List
This section explains the attribute IDs and operation commands used for each sensor
amplifier's message communication, including error codes and warning codes.
Reading the Table
Reading the attribute ID

Example) Excerpt from NU Object attribute ID
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Attribute
ID
Name Description
Data
type
Attribute Value 3
Indicates the sensor output.
69H bit0 to 15: Output for
Communication
Output Select from fast output or current WORD R
(105) ID number 1 to 16
value continuous output.
Item Description
(1) Attribute ID Expresses the attribute ID as a hexadecimal (decimal).
(2) Name Indicates the attribute name.
Describes the attribute, and indicates the read data, and the range of parame-
(3) Description
ters which can be set.
(4) Data type Indicates the attribute data type.
Indicates the direction of services on the attribute ID.
R (Read): The attribute values can be read using Get_Attribute_Single and
(5) Attribute
Get_Attributes_All.
W (Write): Can write a value into the attributes using Set_Attribute_Single.
(6) Value Describes the parameter value which can be set.
Data type
The data type is defined in the following manner by the EtherNet/IP specifications.
Range
Data type Description
Minimum Maximum
INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767
UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535
WORD Bit string: 16-bit - -
Character string (2-byte length
STRING information + 1-byte - -
per 1-character array)

3-5 Parameter List
NU-EP1
NU-EP1 (Instance ID: 0)
Attribute ID Name Description Data type Attribute Value

Bit0: NU-EP1 Error Status
Bit1 to 7: Reserved
Bit8: Updating Sensor Setting
Bit9: Sensor EEPROM Busy
Indicates the status of this Bit10: Sensor External Input
64H 2byte
Status unit and connected sensor R Busy
(100) WORD
amplifiers. Bit11: Sensor Setting Error
3
Bit12: Reserved
Bit13: Sensor Ready
Bit14: Warning Status
Bit15: Error Status
Indicates the error status of
Communication
65H Sensor Error 2byte Bit0 to 15: ID number 1 to 16

the connected sensor R
(101) Status WORD error status
amplifiers.
Indicates the warning sta-
66H Sensor Warn- 2byte Bit0 to 15: ID number 1 to 16
tus of the connected sensor R
(102) ing Status WORD warning status
amplifiers.
Indicates the status of L-on/
67H L-on/D-on 2byte Bit0 to 15: ID number 1 to 16
D-on (N.O./N.C.) of each R
(103) (N.O./N.C.) WORD L-on/D-on status
amplifier.
Indicates the status of the
68H Current Value 2byte Bit0 to 15: ID number 1 to 16
current value of each ampli- R
(104) Property WORD current value status*1
fier.
Indicates the status of out-
69H 2byte Bit0 to 15: ID number 1 to 16
Output put of each amplifier. R
(105) WORD output
(attribute ID: B3H)
6AH
(106) to Reserved for
- - - -
6BH system
(107)
Indicates the ID number of 0: ID No. of the NU-EP1
6CH Error ID the unit experiencing an 2byte
R 1 to 16: ID No. of the sensor
(108) Number UINT
error.*1 amplifier
0: No error
6DH Indicates the Error code 2byte 1: Error 1
Error Code R
(109) that is occurring. UINT ...
7: Error 7
6EH Warning ID Indicates the ID number of 2byte
R
(110) Number the unit issuing a warning. UINT
0: No warning
6FH Indicates the Warning code 2byte 1: Error 1
Warning Code R
(111) that is occurring. UINT ...
7: Error 7
Indicates the ID number of 0: No setting error
70H Setting Error 2byte
the unit experiencing a set- R 1 to 16: ID No. of the sensor
(112) ID Number UINT
ting problem. amplifier
71H
- - - -
73H system
(115)
Fast Output fast output of each ampli- R
(116) WORD fast output status
fier.
Indicates the status of cur- Bit0 to 15: ID number 1 to 16
75H Current Value 2byte
rent value sync. output of R current value sync. output
(117) Sync. Output WORD
each amplifier. status

3-5 Parameter List
NU-EP1

76H
- - - -
7FH system
(127)
Bit0 to 15: ID number 1 to 16
80H Updating Sen- Indicates the update status 2byte
R updating sensor setting sta-
(128) sor Setting of each amplifier. WORD
tus
Sensor Indicates the EEPROM
EEPROM update status of each R
(129) WORD sensor EEPROM busy status
Busy amplifier.
Bit0 to 15: ID number 1 to 16
82H Sensor Exter- Indicates the external input 2byte
(130) nal Input Busy status of each amplifier.

WORD
R sensor external input busy
status 3
83H Sensor Setting 2byte Bit0 to 15: ID number 1 to 16
setting error bit of each R
(131) Error WORD sensor setting error status
amplifier.
Communication
84H Reserved for
- - - -
(132) system
Sensor Ready Sensor Ready bit of each R
(133) WORD sensor ready status
amplifier.
86H
- - - -
8CH system
(140)
Indicates the current value Bit0 to 15: ID number 1 to 16
8DH Current Value 2byte
invalid status of each sen- R
(141) Invalid
sor amplifier.
WORD current value invalid status*1

8EH Current Value 2byte
under range status of each R current value under range
(142) Under Range WORD
sensor amplifier. status*1
8FH Current Value 2byte
over range status of each R current value over range sta-
(143) Over Range WORD
sensor amplifier. tus*1
Indicates the ID number of 0: Sensor not connected
90H 1st Sensor ID 2byte
the 1st sensor R 1 to 16: ID number of con-
(144) Number UINT
amplifier. nected sensor
91H
•
(145) to
•
9EH
•
(158)
Indicates the ID number of 0: Sensor not connected
9FH 16th Sensor 2byte
the 16th sensor R 1 to 16: ID number of con-
(159) ID Number UINT
amplifier. nected sensor
A0H
- - - -
AFH system
(175)
Set up the condition to
B0H Sensor Status determine if the MS LED 2byte 0: Not mask
R/W
(176) Mask Setting blinks in red when the sen- UINT 1: Mask
sor error or warning occurs.
0: Sensor not connected
B1H Sensor Con- Indicates the number of 2byte
R 1 to 16: Number of connected
(177) nected Number amplifiers connected. UINT
sensor amplifiers
B2H Sensor Total Indicates the total number 2byte
R 0 to 16
(178) ID Number of sensor ID. UINT
Select the type of output
B3H Output Select 2byte 0: Fast Output
opened via cyclic communi- R/W
(179) Setting UINT 1: Sync. Output
cation.

3-5 Parameter List
NU-EP1

B4H
- - - -
02FFH system
(767)
0300H Error Code Indicates the error code of 2byte "Error code list" (page 3-
R
(768) (ID number 0) ID number 0. UINT 23)
0301H Error Code Indicates the error code of 2byte "Parameter List" (page 3-
R
0302H
•
(770) to
•
3 030FH
(783)
•
0310H Error Code Indicates the error code of 2byte "Parameter List" (page 3-
R
Communication
Refer to the attribute IDs of sensor amplifiers connected to each ID number.

"Parameter List" (page 3-37)
*1 For details, refer to "Current Value Property of the Sensor" (page 5-44).

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
FS-N40/N42*/N44* (Instance ID : 1 to 16)
Refer to "How to Use NU Objects" (page 3-32) for how to use the parameters.
Designate the ID number of the installed sensor for the instance ID.
 : Default value

0320H Group1 Entry Indicates the number of 2byte
R 18
(800) count entries in Group 1. UINT
Bit0: Over Current Error
0321H Error Informa-

Indicates error information.
When an error occurs, the 2byte
Bit1: Reserve
Bit2: EEPROM Error
Bit3: Reserve
3
R Bit4: Reserve
(801) tion corresponding bit is turned WORD
Bit5: DATUM Correction Error
Communication
ON.
Bit6: APC Error
Bit7: Sensor Communication
Error
Indicates warning informa-
0322H Warning Infor- tion. When a warning 2byte
R Bit0: Limit Detection
(802) mation occurs, the corresponding WORD
bit is turned ON.
Indicates the operating sta-
tus of the warning function.
0323H Warning Func- 2byte
When the warning function R Bit0: Limit Detection
(803) tion WORD
is operating, the corre-
sponding bit is turned ON.
Indicates the output status
0324H of the sensor. When the 2byte Bit0: Out 1
Output R
(804) output is ON, the corre- WORD Bit1: Out2 *1
0325H Indicates the current value 2byte
Current Value R 0 to 65535
(805) of received light intensity. UINT
0326H
Reserved - - - -
(806)
0327H
Reserved - - - -
(807)
Indicates the received light
0328H intensity before correction 2byte
Raw Value R 0 to 65535
(808) with the Preset, DATUM, or UINT
Zero-shift functions.
Indicates the peak value (or
the max bottom value) of
0329H Peak-Hold 2byte
received light intensity R 0 to 65535
(809) Value UINT
(depending on the settings
of Hold display).
Indicates the bottom value
(or the min peak value) of
032AH Bottom-Hold 2byte
(810) Value UINT
(depending on the settings
of Hold display).
032BH
Reserved - - - -
(811)
Indicates the lowest value
among max values of
Peak-Hold received light intensity
032CH 2byte
Minimum during the time period R 0 to 65535
(812) UINT
Value when the setting value of
received light intensity is
exceeded.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
 : Default value

Preset/Datum Indicates the setting value
032DH 2byte
Internal Set- before scaling with the Pre- R 0 to 65535
(813) UINT
ting Value set/DATUM function.
0: No Customize / DATUM
Indicates the operating sta- 1: Preset
032EH Display Cus- 2byte
tus of Readings Correction R 2: Zero-shift
(814) tomize INT
function. 3: Work Preset
4: Work Preset (Reverse)
032FH Slide Switch Indicates the status of the 2byte 0: Selecting [SEL]/[1ch]
R
(815) Status Slide Switch. INT 1: Selecting [TERA]/[2ch]
Saturation
0330H Indicates the status of the 2byte 0: Off
3 (816)
Canceling sta-
tus
Saturation Cancel function. INT
R
1: On
0: Normal Operation
0331H Operation Indicates the current opera- 2byte 1: LED off
R
(817) Mode tion mode of the sensor. INT 2: Sleep
Communication
3: Pause
0: Normal Operation 
0332H Operation Set the operation mode of 2byte 1: LED off
R/W
(818) Mode Setting the sensor. INT 2: Sleep
3: Pause
0333H
(819) to
Reserved - - - -
033FH
(831)
Indicates the number of
0340H Group2 Entry 2byte
entries that can be set in R 9
(832) count UINT
Group 2.
Indicates the setting value
Setting Value of the output 1. The upper
0341H 2byte
(Output 1/ limit of the setting value is R/W 0 to 65535 (Default: 100)
(833) UINT
Area Hi) displayed when in Area
Detection mode.
0342H Setting Value Indicates the setting value 2byte
R/W 0 to 65535 (Default: 100)
(834) (Output2) of Output 2. UINT
0343H
Reserved - - - -
(835)
Indicates the lower limit of
0344H Setting Value 2byte
the setting value in Area R/W 0 to 65535 (Default: 100)
(836) (Area Low) UINT
Detection mode.
0345H
Reserved - - - -
(837)
0346H
Reserved - - - -
(838)
0347H Limit Detec- Indicates if Limit Detection 2byte 0: Off 
R/W
(839) tion is enabled. INT 1: On
Indicates the Limit Detec-
0348H Limit Detec- tion point as a ratio defining 2byte
R/W 0 to 100 (Default: 5)
(840) tion Point the setting value (output 1) INT
as "100".
Limit Detec-
0349H Indicates the reset method 2byte 0: User reset 
tion Reset R/W
(841) of the Limit Detection. INT 1: Auto reset
Method
034AH
(842) to
Reserved - - - -
034FH
(847)
[Custom] Indicates the number of
0350H 2byte
Group2 Entry entries that can be set in R 9
(848) UINT
count Group 2 custom save area.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
 : Default value

[Custom]Set-
0351H ting Value Custom save area for "Set- 2byte
R/W 0 to 65535 (Default: 100)
(849) (Output 1/ ting Value (Output1)". UINT
Area Hi)
[Custom]Set-
0352H Custom save area for "Set- 2byte
ting value R/W 0 to 65535 (Default: 100)
(850) ting Value (Output2)". UINT
(Output 2)
0353H
Reserved - - - -
(851)
[Custom]Set-
0354H Custom save area for "Set- 2byte
ting Value R/W 0 to 65535 (Default: 100)
(852) ting Value (Area Low)". UINT
0355H
(853)
(Area Low)
Reserved - - - -
3
0356H
Reserved - - - -
Communication
(854)
0357H [Custom]Limit Custom save area for "Limit 2byte 0: Off 
R/W
(855) Detection Detection". INT 1: On
[Custom]Limit
0358H Custom save area for "Limit 2byte
Detection R/W 0 to 100 (Default: 5)
(856) Detection Point". INT
Point
0359H [Custom] Custom save area for 2byte 0: User reset 
R/W
(857) Reset Method "Reset Method". INT 1: Auto reset
035AH
(858) to
Reserved - - - -
035FH
(863)
(864) count UINT
Group 3.
0: Unlock 
0361H Key Lock Sta- Indicates the status of the 2byte 1: Key Lock
R/W
(865) tus Key Lock. INT 2: PIN Code Lock
3: Communication Lock
0362H Indicates the password for 2byte
PIN Code R/W 0 to 9999 (Default: 0)
(866) Key Lock. INT
Indicates lock status of the
Slide Switch. When locked,
0363H Slide Switch the Slide Switch is dis- 2byte 0: Unlock 
R/W
(867) Lock abled, with the value INT 1: Lock
always being "SEL" (When
using FS-N44*, "1".).
Indicates whether the out-
put is ON for light (L-on) or Bit0: Output 1
0364H L-on/D-on 2byte
(868) (N.O./N.C.)
ON for dark (D-on). The
WORD
R/W Bit1: Output 2 *1
corresponding bit is turned (Default: 0)
ON for D-on or N.C..

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
 : Default value

0: S-HSPD
(Response Time 23us)
1: HSPD
2: FINE
(Response Time 250us) 
3: TURBO
0365H 2byte (Response Time 500us)
Power Modes Indicates the Power mode. R/W
(869) INT 4: SUPER
(Response Time 1ms)
5: ULTRA
(Response Time 4ms)
3 6: MEGA
(Response Time 16ms)
7: TERA
0366H
Communication
Reserved - - - -
(870)
Indicates target value of
Percentage percentage calibration
0367H 2byte
Calib. Target when the Sensitivity Setting R/W -99 to 99 (Default: -10)
(871) INT
Value is set to Percentage Cali-
bration.
Indicates the target value
for percentage calibration
when the Sensitivity setting
0368H Area % Set- 2byte
is set to percentage calibra- R/W 1 to 99 (Default: 10)
(872) ting INT
tion and the Detection
mode is set to Area detec-
tion mode.
0: Level 1
1: Level 2
0369H Indicates the hysteresis 2byte
Hysteresis R/W 2: Level 3 
(873) setting. INT
3: Level 4
4: Level 5
036AH Indicates if the Bar Graph is 2byte 0: Off 
Display Bar R/W
(874) enabled on the display. INT 1: On
Indicates the method of Key
036BH Key Lock 2byte 0: Normal 
Lock when being set via the R/W
(875) Method INT 1: PIN Code
buttons on the sensor.
036CH
(876) to
Reserved - - - -
036FH
(879)
0370H 2byte
(880) UINT
0: Unlock 
0371H [Custom]Key Custom save area for "Key 2byte 1: Key Lock
R/W
(881) Lock Status Lock Status". INT 2: PIN Code Lock
0372H [Custom]PIN Custom save area for "PIN 2byte
(882) Code Code". INT
0373H [Custom]Slide Custom save area for "Slide 2byte 0: Unlock 
R/W
(883) Switch Lock Switch Lock". INT 1: Lock
[Custom]L-on/ Bit0: Output 1
0374H Custom save area for "Lon/ 2byte
(884)
D-on (N.O./
D-on (N.O./N.C.)". INT
R/W Bit1: Output 2 *1
N.C.) (Default: 0)

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
 : Default value

0: S-HSPD
1: HSPD
2: FINE
(Response Time 250us) 
3: TURBO
0375H [Custom] Custom save area for the 2byte (Response Time 500us)
R/W
(885) Power Mode "Power Mode". INT 4: SUPER
(Response Time 1ms)
5: ULTRA
(Response Time 4ms)
6: MEGA
7: TERA
3
0376H
Communication
Reserved - - - -
(886)
[Custom]Per- Custom save area for the
0377H 2byte
centage Carib. "Percentage Calib.Target R/W -99 to 99 (Default: -10)
(887) INT
Target Value Value".
0378H [Custom]Area Custom save area for the 2byte
(888) % Setting "Area Percentage Setting". INT
0: Level 1
1: Level 2
0379H [Custom] Custom save area for the 2byte
R/W 2: Level 3 
(889) Hysteresis "Hysteresis". UINT
3: Level 4
4: Level 5
037AH [Custom]Dis- Custom save area for the 2byte 0: Off 
R/W
(890) play Bar "Display Bar". INT 1: On
037BH [Custom]Key Custom save area for the 2byte 0: Normal 
R/W
(891) Lock Method "Key Lock Method". INT 1: PIN Code
037CH
(892) to
Reserved - - - -
037FH
(895)
(896) count UINT
Group 4.
0: Timer Off 
1: Off-delay Timer
0381H Output Timer Indicates the settings for 2byte 2: On-delay Timer
R/W
(897) (Output 1) the Output 1 timer. INT 3: One-shot Timer
4: On-delay Off-delay
5: On-delay One-shot
Indicates the Timer Dura-
tion for the Output 1 timer.
0382H Timer Dura- tion for the "On-delay" 2byte
(898) tion (Output 1) when the "Output timer INT
(Output 1)" is set to "On-
delay Off-delay" or "On-
delay One shot". (Unit: ms)
tion for the "Off-delay" or
Timer Dura- the "One-shot" when the
0383H 2byte
tion 2 "Output timer (Output 1)" is R/W 1 to 9999 (Default: 10)
(899) INT
(Output 1) set to "On-delay Off-delay"
or "On-delay One shot".
(Unit: ms)

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
 : Default value

0: Normal Detection Mode 
1: PREST
2: Percentage Calibration
3: Zero-shift Calibration
Detection 4: Area Detection Mode
0384H Indicates the detection 2byte
Mode R/W 5: Area % Mode
(900) mode for Output 1. INT
(Output 1) 6: DATUM Mode
7: Rising Edge Detection
Mode
8: Falling Edge Detection
Mode
0: Level1: (Slow) 
3 0385H
(901)
DATUM Speed
Indicates the DATUM cor-
rection speed.
2byte
INT
R/W 1: Level2: (Normal)
2: Level3: (Fast)
0386H DATUM Warn- Indicates the DATUM alarm 2byte
R/W 0 ot 100 (Default: 50)
(902) ing Level output level. INT
Communication
0: Not use 
1: External Calibration
2: Zero-shift
0387H Indicates the control input 2byte
External Input R/W 3: Reset
(903) settings. INT
4: Transmission OFF
5: Pause Mode
6: Sleep Mode
0: Always Off 
0388H Sets the output status of 2byte
Pause Mode R/W 1: Always On
(904) the sensor to Pause mode. INT
2: Keep Output
0389H 2byte
Attenuation Switch the lighting power. R/W 1 to 100 (Default: 100)
(905) INT
038AH
(906) to
Reserved - - - -
038FH
(911)
0390H 2byte
Group4 Entry entries that can be set in R
(912) UINT
0: Timer Off 
1: Off-delay Timer
[Custom]Out-
0391H Custom save area for "Out- 2byte 2: On-delay Timer
put Timer R/W
(913) put Timer (Output1)". INT 3: One-shot Timer
(Output 1)
[Custom] Custom save area for
0392H 2byte
Timer Dura- "Timer Duration (Output R/W 1 to 9999 (Default: 10)
(914) INT
tion (Output 1) 1)".
[Custom]
Custom save area for
0393H Timer Dura- 2byte
"Timer Duration 2 (Output R/W 1 to 9999 (Default: 10)
(915) tion 2 (Output INT
2)".
1)
1: PREST
2: Percentage Calibration
[Custom] Custom save area for 4: Area Detection Mode
0394H 2byte
Detection "Detection Mode (Out- R/W 5: Area % Mode
(916) INT
Mode put1)". 6: DATUM Mode
7: Rising Edge Detection
Mode
Mode
0: Level1: (Slow) 
0395H [Custom] Custom save area for 2byte
R/W 1: Level2: (Normal)
(917) DATUM Speed "DATUM Speed". INT
2: Level3: (Fast)

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
 : Default value

[Custom]
0396H Custom save area for 2byte
DATUM Warn- R/W 0 ot 100 (Default: 50)
(918) "DATUM Warning Level". INT
ing Level
0: Not use 
2: Zero-shift
0397H [Custom] Custom save area for "Con- 2byte
R/W 3: Reset
(919) External Input trol Input". INT
4: Transmission OFF
5: Pause Mode
6: Sleep Mode
0: Always Off 
R/W
3
1: Always On
(920) Pause Mode "Pause Mode". INT
2: Keep Output
(921) Attenuation "Attenuation". INT
Communication
039AH
(922) to
Reserved - - - -
039FH
(927)
03A0H Group5 Entry 2byte
(928) count UINT
Group 5.
0: Timer Off 
1: Off-delay Timer
03A1H Output Timer Indicates the settings of the 2byte 2: On-delay Timer
R/W
(929) (Output 2) *1 Output 2 timer. INT 3: One-shot Timer
tion for the Output 2 timer.
Timer tion for the "On-delay"
03A2H Duration 2byte
when the "Output timer R/W 1 to 9999 (Default: 10)
(930) INT
(Output 2) *1 (Output 2)" is set to "On-
delay Off-delay" or "On-
delay One shot". (Unit: ms)
(Unit: ms)
tion for the "Off-delay" or
Timer the "One-shot" when the
03A3H Duration 2 2byte
"Output timer (Output 2)" is R/W 1 to 9999 (Default: 10)
(931) INT
(Output 2) *1 set to "On-delay Off-delay"
or "On-delay One shot".
(Unit: ms)
Detection
03A4H Mode Indicates the detection 2byte 0: Normal Detection Mode 
R/W
(932) mode of Output 2. INT 1: Warning Output
(Output 2) *1
03A5H
(933) to
Reserved - - - -
03AFH
(943)
03B0H 2byte
(944) UINT
0: Timer Off 
[Custom] 1: Off-delay Timer
03B1H Output Timer Custom area for "Output- 2byte 2: On-delay Timer
R/W
(945) Timer (Output 2)". INT 3: One-shot Timer
(Output 2) *1 4: On-delay Off-delay

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
 : Default value

[Custom]
Timer Custom save area for
03B2H 2byte
Duration "Timer Duration (Output R/W 1 to 9999 (Default: 10)
(946) INT
2)".
(Output 2) *1
[Custom]
Timer Custom save area for
03B3H 2byte
Duration 2 "Timer Duration 2 (Output R/W 1 to 9999 (Default: 10)
(947) INT
2)".
(Output 2) *1
[Custom]
03B4H Detection 2byte 0: Normal Detection Mode 
Mode "Detection Mode (Out- R/W
(948) INT 1: Warning Output
put2)".
3 03B5H
(Output 2) *1
(949) to
Reserved - - - -
03BFH
Communication
(959)
03C0H Group6 Entry 2byte
(960) count UINT
Group 6.
03C1H Indicates the display 2byte 0: Normal 
Flip Display R/W
(961) reverse setting. INT 1: Reverse
0: Off 
1: Excess Gain(%)
03C2H Indicates the sub display 2byte
Sub Display R/W 2: Display Hold
(962) details. INT
3: Gain(%) Hold
4: TAG Strings
0: Normal 
Indicates hold details when 1: Peak Max. / Peak Min.
03C3H 2byte
Display Hold the Display Hold is selected R/W 2: Bottom Max. / Bottom Min.
(963) INT
under the Sub-display. 3: Peak Min. / Bottom Max.
4: Peak Max. / Bottom Min.
03C4H
Reserved - - - -
(964)
03C5H Preset Satura- Indicates the Preset satura- 2byte
R/W 100 to 200 (Default: 110)
(965) tion Level tion level. INT
0: Normal 
03C6H Current Dis- Indicates the current dis- 2byte
R/W 1: Bar
(966) play play. INT
2: Sub
03C7H
Reserved - - - -
(967)
0: Brightness 1
03C8H Display Bright- Indicates the display bright- 2byte
R/W 1: Brightness 2
(968) ness ness for the sensor. INT
2: Brightness 3 
03C9H
Reserved - - - -
(969)
0: Disable
Active-
03CAH Indicates the operation set- 2byte 1: Output Link 
Receiver Set- R/W
(970) ting for the Active receiver. INT 2: Reversed Operation
ting
3: Always On
03CBH
(971) to
Reserved - - - -
03CDH
(973)
0: English 
03CEH Indicates the selected lan- 2byte 1: Japanese
Language R/W
(974) guage for the display. INT 2: Chinese
3: Deutsch
03CFH
Reserved - - - -
(975)

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
 : Default value

03D0H 2byte
(976) UINT
03D1H [Custom]Flip Custom save area for the 2byte 0: Normal 
R/W
(977) Display "Flip Display". INT 1: Reverse
0: Off 
1: Excess Gain(%)
03D2H [Custom]Sub Custom save area for "Sub 2byte
R/W 2: Display Hold
(978) Display Display". INT
3: Gain(%) Hold
4: TAG Strings
0: Normal 
03D3H
(979)
[Custom]Dis-
play Hold
Custom save area for "Dis-
play Hold".
2byte
INT
R/W
1: Peak Max. / Peak Min.
2: Bottom Max. / Bottom Min.
3: Peak Min. / Bottom Max.
3
Communication
03D4H
Reserved - - - -
(980)
Custom save area for "Pre-
[Custom]Pre-
03D5H set SaturationLevel". Indi- 2byte
set Saturation R/W 100 to 200 (Default: 110)
(981) cates the value from INT
Level
custom save execution.
0: Normal 
03D6H [Custom]Cur- Custom save area for "Cur- 2byte
R/W 1: Bar
(982) rent Display rent Display". INT
2: Sub
03D7H
Reserved - - - -
(983)
[Custom]Dis- 0: Brightness 1
03D8H Custom save area for "Dis- 2byte
play Bright- R/W 1: Brightness 2
(984) play Brightness". INT
ness 2: Brightness 3 
03D9H
Reserved - - - -
(985)
[Custom] 0: Disable
03DAH Active- Custom save area for 2byte 1: Output Link 
R/W
(986) Receiver Set- "Active-Receiver Setting". INT 2: Reversed Operation
ting 3: Always On
03DBH
(987) to
Reserved - - - -
03DDH
(989)
0: English 
03DEH [Custom]Lan- Custom save area for "Lan- 2byte 1: Japanese
R/W
(990) guage guage". INT 2: Chinese
3: Deutsch
03DFH
Reserved - - - -
(991)
03E0H Group7 Entry 2byte
items (entries) that can be R 10
(992) count UINT
set in Group 7.
03E1H
Reserved - - - -
(993)
03E2H Indicates the TAG character 8byte 8 characters or less
TAG Strings R/W
(994) string. STRING (Default: "") *2
03E3H
(995) to
Reserved - - - -
03E5H
(997)
0: Off 
03E6H Indicates operating status 2byte 1: On
ECO R/W
(998) of the power save function. INT 2: Full
3: All

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
 : Default value

03E7H Auto Power Indicates operating status 2byte 0: Off
R/W
(999) Control of the APC function. INT 1: On 
03E8H Indicates operating status 2byte 0: Standard 
Display Gain R/W
(1000) of the display gain setting. INT 1: Full
Indicates whether the num-
03E9H Interference 2byte 0: Standard 
ber of interference preven- R/W
(1001) Prevention INT 1: Double
tion devices is doubled.
Indicates whether the Pre-
Parameter set/Zero-shift settings are
03EAH 2byte 0: No
Save by Ext. stored in EEPROM when R/W
(1002) INT 1: Yes 
Input executing Preset/Zero-shift
3 03EBH
(1003) to
with the external input.
Reserved - - - -
03EFH
Communication
(1007)
03F0H 2byte
(1008) UINT
03F1H
Reserved - - - -
(1009)
03F2H [Custom]TAG Custom save area for "TAG 2byte 8 characters or less
R/W
(1010) Strings strings". STRING (Default: "") *2
03F3H
(1011) to
Reserved - - - -
03F5H
(1013)
0: Off 
03F6H [Custom] Custom save area for 2byte 1: On
R/W
(1014) Power Save "Power Save". INT 2: Full
3: All
03F7H Custom save area for 2byte 0: Off
[Custom]APC R/W
(1015) "APC". INT 1: On 
03F8H [Custom]Dis- Custom save area for "Dis- 2byte 0: Standard 
R/W
(1016) play Gain play Gain". INT 1: Full
[Custom]Inter-
03F9H Custom save area for 2byte 0: Standard 
ference Pre- R/W
(1017) "Interference Prevention". INT 1: Double
vention
[Custom]
03FAH Parameter 2byte 0: No
"Parameter Save by Ext. R/W
(1018) Save by Ext. INT 1: Yes 
Input".
Input
03FBH
(1019) to
Reserved - - - -
03FFH
(1023)
items (entries) that can be R 9
(1024) count UINT
set in Group 8.
0401H ID Number Indicates number of used 2byte FS-N40/42* : 1
R
(1025) Count IDs. INT FS-N44* : 2
0402H
Reserved - - - -
(1026)
0403H
Reserved - - - -
(1027)
0404H 2byte FS-N40/N42* : 2025
Product Code Indicates product code. R
(1028) INT FS-N44* : 2026

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*
 : Default value

Indicates revision, with the
upper bytes representing
0405H 2byte
Revision the major revision and the R 0100H to FFFFH
(1029) INT
lower bytes representing
the minor revision.
FS-N40/N42* : "FS-N40/
0406H Indicates model designa-
Product Name STRING R N42*"
(1030) tion of the sensor.
FS-N44* : "FS-N44*"
0407H
(1031) to
Reserved - - - -
040DH
(1037)
040EH
(1038)
Series Code Indicates series code.
2byte
INT
R
FS-N40/N42* : 2025
FS-N44* : 2026
3
040FH 2byte
Series Version Indicates series version. R 1
(1039) INT
Communication
0410H 2byte
Device Type Indicates device type. R 0
(1040) INT
0411H
(1041) to
Reserved - - - -
041FH
(1055)
*1 FS-N44* 2-output type only.

*2 Refer to the "List of Character String Codes" (page 5-45) for the character
strings which can be used with this unit.
Reference
• [Custom]*** represents parameters that can be saved and recalled the
FS-N40 series “custom save” function.
• “Entry count” indicates the number of parameters in the same group.
 Attribute IDs corresponding to operation commands (service 4BH)

The details of the operation command (service code 4BH) are designated with the
instance ID (each ID number) and attribute ID.
Details on the selectable operation commands are given below.
Attribute ID Name Details

0301H(769) Initialize Executes initialization.
Save the current settings to the "Custom Save"
0302H(770) Custom Save
area.
Maximum Sensi-
0303H(771) Executes maximum sensitivity calibration.
tivity Calibration
Percentage Cali- Executes calibration as a percentage of the
0304H(772)
bration received light value.
Two-point Cali- Starts calibration the 1st point of 2-point calibra-
0305H(773)
bration: 1st tion.
Two-point Cali- Starts calibration the 2nd point of 2-point cali-
0306H(774)
bration: 2nd bration.
Positioning Cali- Starts calibration the 1st point of positioning cal-
0305H(773)
bration: 1st ibration.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N40/N42*/N44*

Positioning Cali- Starts calibration the 2nd point of positioning
0307H(775)
bration: 2nd calibration.
Full Auto Calibra-
0308H(776) Starts fully automatic calibration.
tion: Start
Full Auto Calibra-
0309H(777) Ends fully automatic calibration.
tion: Finish
Zero-shift
030AH(778) Executes zero shift.
Request
3 030BH(779) Zero-shift Cancel Cancels zero shift.
030CH(780) Preset Request Executes preset.
Communication
030DH(781) Preset Cancel Cancels preset.

Saturation Can-
030EH(782) Executes saturation canceling.
celing: Request
Saturation Can-
030FH(783) Cancels saturation canceling.
celing: Cancel
Reset Hold
0310H(784) Resets the held value.
Value
Work-Preset
0311H(785) Executes workpiece preset.
Request
Full Auto Preset:
Starts fully automatic (or maximum sensitivity)
0312H(786)
Start preset.
Full Auto Preset:
Ends fully automatic (or maximum sensitivity)
0313H(787)
Finish preset.
Executes maximum sensitivity preset. (Preset
Maximum Sensi-
0314H(788) can be executed without specifying the start and
tivity Preset Req.
end.)
0316H(790) Reset User Load the settings from the "Custom Save" area.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12
FS-N10/N12 (Instance ID: 1 to 16)
Refer to "How to Use NU Objects" (page 3-32) for details on using the parame-
ters.
 : Default value
Attribute ID Item Description Data type Attribute Value

(800) count
Group 1.
INT

3
Bit1: Reserve
Bit2: EEPROM Error
Communication
Indicates error informa-
Bit3 to 4: Reserve
0321H Error Infor- tion. When an error 2byte
R Bit5: DATUM Correction
(801) mation occurs, the correspond- WORD
Error
ing bit is turned ON.
Bit6: APC Error
Bit7: Sensor Communica-
tion Error
Indicates warning informa-
0322H Warning tion. When a warning 2byte
(802) Information occurs, the corresponding WORD
bit is turned ON.
Indicates operating status
of the warning function.
0323H Warning 2byte
When the warning function R Bit0: Limit Detection
(803) Function WORD
is operating, the corre-
Indicates output status of
the sensor. When the
0324H 2byte
Output output is ON, the corre- R Bit0: Output
(804) WORD
sponding bit is turned
ON.
0325H Current Indicates current value of 2byte
R 0 to 9999
(805) Value received light intensity. INT
0326H
- - - -
0327H system
(807)
Indicates the received
light intensity before cor-
0328H 2byte
Raw Value rection with Preset, R 0 to 65535*1
(808) UINT
DATUM, or Zero-shift
functions.
Indicates the peak value
(or the max bottom value) 2byte
0329H Peak-Hold
of received light intensity R 0 to 9999
(809) Value INT
(depending on the set-
tings of Hold display).
(or the min peak value) of 2byte
032AH Bottom-Hold
(810) Value INT
(depending on the
settings of Hold display).
032BH Reserved for
- - - -
(811) system

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12
 : Default value
Indicates the lowest value

among max values of
Peak-Hold received light intensity
032CH 2byte
(812) when the setting value of INT
Value
exceeded.
Preset/ Preset/Indicates the set-
032DH 2byte
DATUM Inter- ting value before scaling R 0 to 65535*1
(813) UINT
nal Value with the DATUM function.
0: No Customize / DATUM 
3 032EH
(814)
Display Cus-
tomize
Indicates the operating
status of the Readings
Correction function.
2byte
INT
R
1: Preset
2: Zero-shift
3: Work preset*2
4: Work preset (Reverse)*2
Communication
032FH Slide Switch Indicates the status of the 2byte 0: Selecting SEL
R
(815) Status amplifier Slide Switch. INT 1: Selecting MEGA
0330H Saturation 2byte 0: Not Active
saturation canceling R
(816) Canceling INT 1: Active
function.
0: RUN
Indicates the current
0331H Operation 2byte 1: LED_OFF
operation mode of the R
(817) Mode INT 2: SLEEP
sensor.
3: PAUSE
0: RUN 
0332H Operation Set the operation mode 2byte 1: LED_OFF
R/W
(818) Mode Setting of the sensor. INT 2: SLEEP
3: PAUSE
0: Initialize 
1: Custom
Select the Recipe to be 2: Fall
0333H Recipe used when executing an 2byte 3: Percentage Calibration
R/W
(819) Select operating command (Load INT 4: Zero-shift
Recipe Data). 5: MEGA
6: Area Detection*2
7: 0 DATUM*2
0334H
- - - -
033FH system
(831)
(832) count INT
Group 2.
Indicates the setting
Setting Value value. The upper limit of
0341H 2byte
(Output / the setting value is dis- R/W 0 to 9999 (Default: 50)
(833) INT
Area High) played when in Area
Detection mode.
0342H
- - - -
0343H system
(835)
Indicates the lower limit
of the setting value in R/W 0 to 9999 (Default:50)
(836) (Area Low) INT
Area detection mode.
0345H
- - - -
0346H system
(838)

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12
 : Default value

0347H Limit Setting value of the warning out- 2byte
R/W 0 to 9999 (Default:0)
(839) Value put when the Limit Detec- INT
tion function is used.
034BH
- - - -
034FH system
(847)
[Custom]
0350H items (entries) that can 2byte
Group2 Entry R 7
(848) be custom saved in INT
count
[Custom]
Group 2.
3
0351H Setting Value "Setting Value". Indi- 2byte
R/W
(849) (Output/Area cates the value from cus- INT
Communication
High) tom save execution.
0352H
- - - -
0353H system
(850)
[Custom] "Setting Value (Area
0354H 2byte
Setting Value Low)". Indicates the value R/W
(852) INT
(Area Low) from custom save execu-
tion.
0355H
- - - -
0356H system
(854)
[Custom]
0357H "Limit Setting Value". 2byte
Limit Setting R/W
(855) Indicates the value from INT
Value
0358H
- - - -
035FH system
(863)
items (entries) that can R 7
(864) count INT
be set in Group 3.
0: Unlock 
0361H Key Lock Indicates status of Key 2byte 1: Key Lock
R/W
(865) Status lock. INT 2: PIN Code Lock
0362H Indicates password for 2byte
PIN Code R/W 0 to 9999 (Default:0)
(866) Key lock. INT
Indicates lock status of
Slide Switch. When
0363H Slide Switch 2byte 0: Unlock 
locked, the Slide Switch R/W
(867) Lock*3 INT 1: Lock
is disabled, with the value
always being "SEL".
Indicates whether the out-
put is ON for light (L-on) or
0364H L-on/D-on 2byte 0: L-on (N.O.) 
ON (D-on) for dark. The R/W
(868) (N.O./N.C.) INT 1: D-on (N.C.)
corresponding bit is turned
ON for D-on or N.C..

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12
 : Default value
0: HIGH SPEED
(Response Time 50µs)
1: FINE (Response Time
250µs) 
2: TURBO (Response Time
0365H Indicates the Power 2byte 500µs)
Power Mode R/W
(869) mode. INT 3: SUPER (Response Time
1ms)
4: ULTRA (Response Time
4ms)
5: MEGA (Response Time
16ms)
3 0366H Sensitivity Indicates the sensitivity 2byte
0: Normal Sensitivity Set-
ting
R/W
(870) Setting setting method. INT 1: Percentage Calibration
Communication
0367H 2byte
Calib. Target when the Sensitivity Set- R/W -99 to 99 (Default: -10)
(871) INT
Value ting is set to Percentage
Calibration.
0368H
- - - -
036FH system
(879)
[Custom]
Group3 Entry R 7
count
Group 3.
Custom save area for "Key
0371H [Custom] Key Lock Status". Indicates the 2byte
R/W
(881) Lock Status value from custom save INT
execution.
Custom save area for "PIN
0372H [Custom] PIN Code". Indicates the value 2byte
R/W
(882) Code from custom save execu- INT
tion.
[Custom]
0373H "Slide Switch Lock". Indi- 2byte
Slide Switch R/W
(883) cates the value from cus- INT
Lock*3
tom save execution.
Custom save area for "L-
[Custom] L-
0374H on/D-on (N.O./N.C.)". 2byte
on/D-on R/W
(N.O./N.C.)
0375H [Custom] "Power Mode". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(885) Power Mode the value from custom INT
save execution.
[Custom]
0376H "Sensitivity Setting". Indi- 2byte
Sensitivity R/W
Setting
tom save execution.
[Custom]
"Percentage Calib.Target
0377H Percentage 2byte
Value". Indicates the R/W
(887) Calib. Target INT
value from custom save
Value
execution.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12
 : Default value
0378H
- - - -
037FH system
(895)
(896) count INT
be set in Group 4.
0: Timer off 
0381H Indicates the settings of 2byte 1: Off-delay Timer
Output Timer R/W
(897) the Output timer. INT 2: On-delay Timer
3: One-shot Timer
0382H
(898)
Timer Value Indicates the timer value.
2byte
INT
R/W 1 to 9999 (Default:10) 3
0383H Reserved for
- - - -
Communication
(899) system
1: DATUM1 Mode
2: DATUM2 Mode
0384H Detection Indicates the detection 2byte 3: Area Detection Mode
R/W
(900) Mode mode. INT 4: Rising Edge Detection
Mode
Mode
0: Level1 (Slow) 
0385H DATUM Indicates the DATUM cor- 2byte
R/W 1: Level2 (Normal)
(901) Speed rection speed. INT
2: Level3 (Fast)
DATUM
0386H Indicates the DATUM 2byte
Warning R/W 0 to 100 (Default: 50)
(902) alarm output level. INT
Level
0: Not use 
2: Preset
0387H Indicates the control input 2byte 3: Zero-shift
Control Input R/W
(903) settings. INT 4: Reset
5: Transmission OFF
6: PAUSE Mode Transition
7: SLEEP Mode Transition
Sets the output status of 0: Always OFF 
0388H 2byte
PAUSE Mode the sensor to PAUSE R/W 1: Always ON
(904) INT
mode. 2: Keep Output
0389H Light Emis- 2byte
Switch the lighting power. R/W 1 to 100 (Default: 100)
(905) sion Power INT
038AH
- - - -
038FH system
(911)
[Custom]
Group4 Entry R 9
count
Group 4.
0391H [Custom] "Output Timer". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(913) Output Timer the value from custom INT
save execution.
0392H [Custom] "Timer Value". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(914) Timer Value the value from custom INT
save execution.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12
 : Default value
0393H Reserved for

- - - -
(915) system
[Custom]
0394H "Detection Mode". Indi- 2byte
Detection R/W
Mode
tom save execution.
[Custom]
0395H "DATUM Speed". Indi- 2byte
DATUM R/W
Speed
tom save execution.
3 0396H
(918)
DATUM
Warning
"DATUM Warning Level".
Indicates the value from
2byte
INT
R/W
Level custom save execution.
Communication

0397H [Custom] "Control Input". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(919) Control Input the value from custom INT
save execution.
0398H [Custom] "PAUSE Mode". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(920) PAUSE Mode the value from custom INT
save execution.
[Custom]
0399H "Light Emission Power". 2byte
Light Emis- R/W
sion Power
039AH
- - - -
039FH system
(927)
(928) count INT
be set in Group 5.
03A1H
- - - -
03A4H system
(932)
Indicates the reset
03A5H Limit Output 2byte 0: Manual 
method of the limit out- R/W
(933) Mode INT 1: Auto
put.
03A6H
- - - -
03AFH system
(943)
[Custom]
03B0H items (entries) that can 2byte
Group5 Entry R 6
count
Group 5.
03B1H
- - - -
03B4H system
(948)
[Custom]
03B5H "Limit Output Mode". Indi- 2byte
Limit Output R/W
Mode
tom save execution.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12
 : Default value
03B6H
- - - -
03BFH system
(959)
(960) count INT
be set in Group 6.
03C1H Display Indicates the display 2byte 0: Normal 
R/W
(961) Reverse reverse settings. INT 1: Reverse
0: None 
1: Extension
03C2H
Sub Display
Indicates the sub display 2byte
R/W
2: Bar
3: Excess Gain (%)
3
(962) details. INT 4: Light Intensity HOLD
5: Excess Gain HOLD (%)
Communication
6: L-on/D-on
7: TAG Strings
0: Normal 
Indicates hold details
when the received light
03C3H 2byte 2: Bottom Max. / Bottom
Hold Display intensity hold display is R/W
(963) INT Min.
selected under the Sub
display.
Indicates whether the
current value of received
03C4H Preset Satu- 2byte 0: Off
light intensity is satu- R/W
(964) ration INT 1: On 
rated when the Preset or
DATUM function is used.
03C5H Preset Satu- Indicates the Preset satu- 2byte
R/W 100 to 200 (Default:110)
(965) ration Level ration level. INT
03C6H Current Dis- Indicates the current dis- 2byte 0: Normal 
R/W
(966) play play. INT 1: Sub
03C7H
- - - -
03CFH system
(975)
[Custom]
03D0H items (entries) that can 2byte
Group6 Entry R 7
count
Group 6.
Custom save area for the
03D1H [Custom] Dis- "Display Reverse". Indi- 2byte
R/W
(977) play Reverse cates the value from cus- INT
tom save execution.
03D2H [Custom] Sub "Sub Display". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(978) Display the value from custom INT
save execution.
03D3H [Custom] "Hold Display". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(979) Hold Display the value from custom INT
save execution.
[Custom]
03D4H "Preset Saturation". Indi- 2byte
Preset Satu- R/W
ration
tom save execution.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12
 : Default value

[Custom]
03D5H "Preset Saturation Level". 2byte
Preset Satu- R/W
ration Level
[Custom]
03D6H "Current Display". Indi- 2byte
Current Dis- R/W
play
tom save execution.
03D7H
- - - -
03DFH system
3 (991)
03E0H Group7 Entry

2byte
(992) count INT
be set in Group 7.
Communication
Indicates the settings of

the disabled warning
03E1H Warning Dis- 2byte
function. When the bit is R/W Bit0: Limit Detection
(993) able WORD
ON, the corresponding
warning does not occur.
03E2H Indicates the TAG char- 8 characters or less
TAG Strings STRING R/W
(994) acter string. (Default: "")
03E3H
- - - -
03E5H system
(997)
0: OFF 
Indicates operating sta-
03E6H 2byte 1: ON
Power Save tus of the power save R/W
(998) INT 2: FULL
function.
3: ALL
03E7H Indicates operating sta- 2byte 0: OFF 
APC R/W
(999) tus of the APC function. INT 1: ON
03E8H 2byte 0: Standard 
Display Gain tus of the display gain R/W
(1000) INT 1: Full
setting.
03E9H Interference number of interference 2byte 0: Normal 
R/W
(1001) Prevention prevention devices is INT 1: Double
doubled.
Preset/Zero-shift settings
Parameter
03EAH are stored in EEPROM 2byte 0: No
Save by Ext- R/W
(1002) when executing Preset/ INT 1: Yes 
Input
Zero-shift with the exter-
nal input.
03EBH
- - - -
03EFH system
(1007)
[Custom]
03F0H items (entries) that can 2byte
Group7 Entry R 11
count
Group 7.
[Custom]
03F1H "Warning Disable". Indi- 2byte
Warning Dis- R/W
able
tom save execution.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12
 : Default value

03F2H [Custom] "TAG Strings". Indicates
STRING R/W
(1010) TAG Strings the value from custom
save execution.
03F3H
- - - -
03F5H system
(1013)
03F6H [Custom] "Power Save". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(1014) Power Save the value from custom INT
save execution.
3
03F7H [Custom] "APC". Indicates the 2byte
R/W
(1015) APC value from custom save INT
Communication
execution.
03F8H [Custom] Dis- "Display Gain". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(1016) play Gain the value from custom INT
save execution.
[Custom]
03F9H "Interference Prevention". 2byte
Interference R/W
Prevention
[Custom]
"Parameter Save by Ext-
03FAH Parameter 2byte
input". Indicates the value R/W
(1018) Save by Ext- INT
from custom save execu-
Input
tion.
03FBH
- - - -
03FFH system
(1023)
(1024) count INT
be set in Group 8.
0401H ID number Indicates number of used 2byte
R 1
(1025) Count IDs. INT
0402H
- - - -
0403H system
(1027)
0404H Product 2byte
Indicates product code. R 2000
(1028) Code INT
Indicates revision, with
the upper bytes
0405H representing the major 2byte
Revision R 0101H to FFFFH
(1029) revision and the lower INT
bytes representing the
minor revision.
0406H Product Indicates model designa-
STRING R "FS-N10/N12 *"
(1030) Name tion of the sensor.
0407H
- - - -
040DH system
(1037)
040EH 2byte
Series Code Indicates series code. R 2000
(1038) INT

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12
 : Default value
040FH Series 2byte

Indicates series version. R 1
(1039) Version INT
0410H 2byte
(1040) INT
0411H
- - - -
041FH system
(1055)
*1 The FS-N10 Series shipped on March 10, 2011 or before will have the range from
3 0 to 9999.
*2 This cannot be set with the FS-N10 Series shipped on March 10, 2011 or before.
*3 If the slide switch is set to “MEGA” while locked, [] will flash on the sensor
Communication
amplifier.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N10/N12

The details of the operation command (service 4BH) are designated with the
0301H(769) Load Recipe Data Reads the recipe.
0302H(770) Custom Save Executes custom save.
Maximum Sensi-
0303H(771) Executes maximum sensitivity calibration.
tivity Setting
0304H(772)
Percentage Cali- Executes percentage calibration of the sensitiv- 3
bration ity.
Two-point/Pos. Starts calibration the 1st point of 2-point cali-
Communication
0305H(773)
Calibration (1st) bration.
Two-point Calibra- Starts calibration the 2nd point of 2-point cali-
0306H(774)
tion (2nd) bration.
Positioning Cali- Starts calibration the 1st point of positioning
0305H(773)
bration (1st) calibration.
0307H(775)
bration (2nd) calibration.
Full Auto Calibra-
tion start
Full Auto Calibra-
tion end
030AH(778) Zero-shift start Executes zero shift.
030BH(779) Zero-shift end Cancels zero shift.
030CH(780) Preset start Executes preset.
030DH(781) Preset end Cancels preset.
Saturation
Canceling start
Saturation
Canceling end
0310H(784) Reset Hold Value Resets the held value.
Work-Preset
0311H (785) Executes workpiece preset.
Request*1
Full Auto Preset: Starts fully automatic (or maximum sensitivity)
0312H(786)
Start*1 preset.
Full Auto Preset: Ends fully automatic (or maximum sensitivity)
0313H(787)
Finish*1 preset.
Maximum Sensi- Executes maximum sensitivity preset. (Preset
0314H(788) tivity Preset: can be executed without specifying the start
Request*1 and end.)

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14
FS-N14 (Instance ID: 1 to 16)
 : Default value

R 22
(800) count entries in Group 1. INT
3 Indicates error information.

Bit1: Reserved
Bit2: EEPROM Error
Bit3 to 4: Reserved
0321H Error Infor- When an error occurs, the 2byte
(801) mation corresponding bit is turned WORD
Communication
Error
ON.
Bit6: APC Error
tion Error
Indicates warning infor-
0322H Warning mation. When a warning 2byte
(802) Information occurs, the correspond- WORD
status of the warning func-
0323H Warning tion. When the warning 2byte
(803) Function function is operating, the WORD
ON.
Indicates the output sta-
tus of the sensor. When
0324H 2byte Bit0: Output1
Output the output is ON, the cor- R
(804) WORD Bit1: Output2
responding bit is turned
ON.
0325H Current 2byte
value of received light R 0 to 9999
(805) Value INT
intensity.
0326H
- - - -
0327H system
(807)
light intensity before cor-
0328H 2byte
Raw Value rection with the Preset, R 0 to 65535*1
(808) UINT
functions.
(or the max bottom value)
(809) Value INT
(810) Value INT
032BH Reserved for
- - - -
(811) system

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14
 : Default value

Indicates the lowest
value among max values
Peak-Hold of received light intensity 2byte
032CH
(812) INT
exceeded.
Preset/ 2byte
032DH value before scaling with
DATUM Inter- R 0 to 65535*1
(813) the Preset/DATUM func- UINT
nal Value
tion.
032EH
(814)
Display Cus-
tomize
status of the Reading
2byte
INT
R
1: Preset
2: Zero-shift
3
Correction function. 3: Work preset*2
4: Work preset (Reverse)*2
Communication
032FH Slide Switch Indicates the status of the 2byte 0: Selecting CH1
R
(815) Status Slide Switch. INT 1: Selecting CH2
Indicates the status of the 2byte
0330H Saturation 0: Not Active
saturation canceling R
(816) Canceling INT 1: Active
function.
0: RUN
0331H Operation 2byte 1: LED_OFF
operation mode of the R
(817) Mode INT 2: SLEEP
sensor.
3: PAUSE
0: RUN 
0332H Operation Set the operation mode 2byte 1: LED_OFF
R/W
(818) Mode Setting of the sensor. INT 2: SLEEP
3: PAUSE
0: Initialize 
1: Custom
Select the Recipe to be 2: Fall
0333H Recipe used when executing an 2byte 3: Percentage Calibration
R/W
(819) Select operating command INT 4: Zero-shift
(Load Recipe Data). 5: MEGA
6: Area Detection*2
7: 0 DATUM*2
0334H
- - - -
033FH system
(831)
(832) count INT
Group 2.
Setting Value value of Output 1. The
0341H 2byte
(Output1/ upper limit of the setting R/W 0 to 9999 (Default:50)
(833) INT
Area High) value is displayed when
in Area Detection mode.
0342H Setting Value Indicates the setting 2byte
(834) (Output2) value of Output 2. INT
0343H Reserved for
- - - -
(835) system
of the setting value in R/W 0 to 9999 (Default:50)
Area detection mode.
0345H
- - - -
0346H system
(838)

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14
 : Default value

0347H Limit Setting value of the warning out- 2byte
(839) Value put when the Limit Detec- INT
tion function is used.
0348H
- - - -
034FH system
(847)
[Custom]
0350H entries that can be set in 2byte
Group 2 R 7
(848) Group 2 custom save INT
3 Entry count
[Custom]
area.
"Setting Value (Output
1)". Indicates the value R/W
Communication
(849) (Output1/ INT

Area High)
tion.
[Custom] "Setting Value (Output 2)
0352H 2byte
Setting Value ". Indicates the value R/W
(850) INT
(Output2) from custom save execu-
tion.
0353H Reserved for
- - - -
(851) system
0354H 2byte
(852) INT
tion.
0355H
- - - -
0356H system
(854)
[Custom]
Limit Setting R/W
Value
0358H
- - - -
035FH system
(863)
(864) count INT
Group 3.
0: Unlock 
0361H Key Lock Indicates the status of the 2byte 1: Key Lock
R/W
(865) Status Key lock. INT 2: PIN Code Lock
0362H Indicates the password 2byte
(866) for Key lock. INT
Slide Switch. When
(867) Lock*3 INT 1: Lock
always being "1ch".

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14
 : Default value

0: Output1:L-on (N.O.)/Out-
Indicates whether the put2:L-on (N.O.) 
output is ON for light (L- 1: Output1:D-on (N.C.)/Out-
0364H L-on/D-on on) or ON (D-on) for dark. 2byte put2:L-on (N.O.)
R/W
(868) (N.O./N.C.) The corresponding bit is INT 2: Output1:L-on (N.O.)/Out-
turned ON for D-on or put2:D-on (N.C.)
N.C.. 3: Output1:D-on (N.C.)/Out-
put2:D-on (N.C.)
0: HIGH SPEED
(Response Time 50 s)
0365H Indicates the Power 2byte

250 s) 
500 s)
3
Power Mode R/W
(869) mode. INT 3: SUPER (Response Time
Communication
1 ms)
4 ms)
16 ms)
0366H Sensitivity Indicates the sensitivity 2byte ting 
R/W
(870) Setting setting method. INT 1: Percentage Calibration
0367H 2byte
(871) INT
Calibration.
0368H
- - - -
036FH system
(879)
[Custom]
Group 3 R 7
Entry count
area.
0371H [Custom] Key "Key Lock Status". Indi- 2byte
R/W
(881) Lock Status cates the value from cus- INT
tom save execution.
0372H [Custom] PIN "PIN Code". Indicates the 2byte
R/W
(882) Code value from custom save INT
execution.
[Custom]
Slide Switch R/W
Lock*3
tom save execution.
[Custom] L-
0374H on/D-on (N.O./N.C.). Indi- 2byte
on/D-on R/W
(N.O./N.C.)
tom save execution.
R/W
save execution.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14
 : Default value

[Custom] "Sensitivity Setting
0376H 2byte
Sensitivity method". Indicates the R/W
(886) INT
Setting value from custom save
execution.
[Custom]
"Percentage Calib. Target
Value
execution.
0378H
3 (888) to
037FH
Reserved for
system
- - - -
(895)
Communication

(896) count INT
Group 4.
0: Timer off 
0381H Output Timer Indicates the settings for 2byte 1: Off-delay Timer
R/W
(897) (Output1) the Output 1 timer. INT 2: On-delay Timer
3: One-shot Timer
0382H Timer Value Indicates the timer value 2byte
(898) (Output1) for the Output 1 timer. INT
0383H Reserved for
- - - -
(899) system
1: DATUM1 Mode
2: DATUM2 Mode
Detection
0384H Indicates the detection 2byte 3: Area Detection Mode
Mode (Out- R/W
(900) mode for Output 1. INT 4: Rising Edge Detection
put1)
Mode
Mode
0385H DATUM Indicates the DATUM cor- 2byte
(901) Speed rection speed. INT
2: Level3 (Fast)
DATUM
0386H Indicates the DATUM 2byte
Warning R/W 0 to 100 (Default:50)
(902) alarm output level. INT
Level
0: Not use 
2: Preset
0387H Indicates the control input 2byte 3: Zero-shift
Control Input R/W
(903) settings. INT 4: Reset
5: Transmission OFF
Sets the output status of 0: Always OFF 
0388H 2byte
PAUSE Mode the sensor to PAUSE R/W 1: Always ON
(904) INT
0389H Light Emis- 2byte
Switch the lighting power. R/W 1 to 100 (Default:100)
(905) sion Power INT
038AH
- - - -
038FH system
(911)

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14
 : Default value

[Custom]
Group 4 R 9
Entry count
area.
[Custom] "Output Timer (Output
0391H 2byte
Output Timer 1)". Indicates the value R/W
(913) INT
tion.
[Custom]
0392H "Timer Value (Output 1)". 2byte
(914)
Timer Value
(Output1)
INT
R/W
3
0393H Reserved for
- - - -
(915) system
Communication
[Custom]
"Detection Mode (Output
0394H Detection 2byte
(916) Mode (Out- INT
put1)
tion.
[Custom]
DATUM R/W
Speed
tom save execution.
0396H DATUM "DATUM Warning Level". 2byte
R/W
(918) Warning Indicates the value from INT
0397H [Custom] "Control Input". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(919) Control Input the value from custom INT
save execution.
R/W
save execution.
[Custom]
0399H "Light Emission Power". 2byte
Light Emis- R/W
sion Power
039AH
- - - -
039FH system
(927)
(928) count INT
Group 5.
0: Timer off 
03A1H Output Timer Indicates the settings of 2byte 1: Off-delay Timer
R/W
(929) (Output2) the Output 2 timer. INT 2: On-delay Timer
3: One-shot Timer
03A2H Timer Value Indicates the timer value 2byte
(930) (Output2) for the Output 2 timer. INT
03A3H Reserved for
- - - -
(931) system
Detection 0: Normal Detection Mode 
03A4H Indicates the detection 2byte
Mode (Out- R/W 1: Limit Setting Output
(932) mode of Output 2. INT
put2) 2: Warning Output

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14
 : Default value

03A5H Limit Output Indicates reset method of 2byte 0: Manual 
R/W
(933) Mode limit output. INT 1: Auto
03A6H
- - - -
03AFH system
(943)
[Custom]
03B0H entries that can be set in 2byte
Group 5 R 6
Entry count
area.
Custom area for "Output
3 03B1H
(945)
[Custom]
Output Timer
(Output2)
Timer (Output 2)". Indi-
cates the value from cus-
2byte
INT
R/W
tom save execution.
Communication

[Custom]
03B2H "Timer Value (Output 2)". 2byte
Timer Value R/W
(Output2)
03B3H Reserved for
- - - -
(947) system
[Custom]
03B4H Detection 2byte
put2)
tion.
[Custom]
Limit Output R/W
Mode
tom save execution.
03B6H
- - - -
03BFH system
(958)
(960) count INT
Group 6.
03C1H Display Indicates the display 2byte 0: Normal 
R/W
(961) Reverse reverse settings. INT 1: Reverse
0: None 
1: Extension
2: Bar
03C2H Indicates the sub display 2byte 3: Excess Gain (%)
Sub Display R/W
(962) details. INT 4: Light Intensity HOLD
6: L-on/D-on
7: TAG Strings
0: Normal 
(963) INT Min.
selected under the Sub
display.
current value of received
light intensity is satu- R/W
rated when the Preset or
03C5H Preset Satu- Indicates the Preset satu- 2byte
R/W 100 to 200 (Default:110)
(965) ration Level ration level. INT

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14
 : Default value

03C6H Current Dis- Indicates the current dis- 2byte 0: Normal 
R/W
(966) play play. INT 1: Sub
03C7H
- - - -
03CFH system
(975)
[Custom]
03D0H entries that can be set in 2byte
Group 6 R 7
Entry count
area.
03D1H
(977)
[Custom] Dis- "Display Reverse". Indi-
play Reverse cates the value from cus-
2byte
INT
R/W 3
tom save execution.
Communication
R/W
save execution.
R/W
save execution.
[Custom]
Preset Satu- R/W
ration
tom save execution.
[Custom]
Preset Satu- R/W
ration Level
[Custom]
Current Dis- R/W
play
tom save execution.
03D7H
- - - -
03DFH system
(991)
(992) count INT
be set in Group 7.
function. When the bit is R/W Bit0: Limit Detection
(993) able WORD
warning does not occur.
(994) acter string. (Default : "")
03E3H
- - - -
03E5H system
(997)
0: OFF 
03E6H 2byte 1: ON
Power Save tus of the power save R/W
(998) INT 2: FULL
function.
3: ALL
03E7H Indicates operating sta- 2byte 0: OFF 
APC R/W
(999) tus of the APC function. INT 1: ON

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14
 : Default value

03E8H 2byte 0: Standard 
Display Gain tus of the display gain R/W
(1000) INT 1: Full
setting.
R/W
doubled.
Preset/Zero-shift set-
Parameter
03EAH tings are stored in 2byte 0: No
Save by Ext- R/W
(1002) EEPROM when execut- INT 1: Yes 
3 Input
ing Preset/Zero-shift with
the external input.
03EBH
Communication
- - - -
03EFH system
(1007)
03F0H 2byte
Group 7 entries that can be set in R 11
(1008) INT
Entry count Group 7 custom save area.
[Custom]
Warning Dis- R/W
able
tom save execution.
STRING R/W
save execution.
03F3H
- - - -
03F5H system
(1013)
R/W
save execution.
03F7H [Custom] "APC". Indicates the 2byte
R/W
(1015) APC value from custom save INT
execution.
R/W
save execution.
[Custom]
Interference R/W
Prevention
[Custom]
Input
tion.
03FBH
- - - -
03FFH system
(1023)

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14
 : Default value

(1024) count INT
be set in Group 8.
R 2
0402H
- - - -
0403H system
(1027)
0404H Product 2byte
(1028) Code INT
the upper bytes repre-
3
0405H senting the major revision 2byte
Communication
(1029) and the lower bytes rep- INT
resenting the minor revi-
sion.
STRING R "FS-N14"
0407H
- - - -
040DH system
(1037)
040EH 2byte
(1038) INT
040FH Series Ver- 2byte
(1039) sion INT
0410H 2byte
(1040) INT
0411H
- - - -
041FH system
(1055)
*1 The FS-N10 Series shipped on March 10, 2011 or before will have the range from
0 to 9999.
*3 If the slide switch is set to “2ch” while locked, [] will flash on the sensor
amplifier.

3-5 Parameter List
FS-N14


0301H(769) Load Recipe Data Reads the recipe.
Maximum Sensi- Executes calibration at the maximum sensitiv-
0303H(771)
tivity Setting ity.
3 0304H(772)
Percentage Cali- Executes calibration at a percentage of the sensi-
bration tivity.
Communication
Two-point/Pos. Starts calibration the 1st point of 2-point cali-

0305H(773)
Calibration (1st) bration.
Two-point Calibra- Starts calibration the 2nd point of 2-point cali-
0306H(774)
tion (2nd) bration.
Positioning Cali- Starts calibration the 1st point of positioning
0305H(773)
bration (1st) calibration.
0307H(775)
bration (2nd) calibration.
Full Auto Calibra-
tion start
Full Auto Calibra-
tion end
030AH(778) Zero-shift start Executes zero shift.
030BH(779) Zero-shift end Cancels zero shift.
030CH(780) Preset start Executes preset.
030DH(781) Preset end Cancels preset.
Saturation Can-
celing start
Saturation Can-
celing end
0310H(784) Reset Hold Value Resets the held value.
Work-Preset
Request*1
0312H(786)
Start*1 preset.
0313H(787)
Finish*1 preset.
0314H(788) tivity Preset: can be executed without specifying the start
Request*1 and end.)

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
LV-N10/N12/N12C (Instance ID: 1 to 16)
Refer to "How to Use NU Objects" (page 3-32) for details on reading the table
and using the parameters.
 : Default value

R 22
Bit1: Sensor-Head Error
3
Bit2: EEPROM Error
Indicates error information. Bit3: Reserve
Communication
0321H Error Infor- When an error occurs, the 2byte Bit4: Reserve
R
(801) mation corresponding bit is turned WORD Bit5: DATUM Correction
ON. Error
Bit6: Reserve
tion Error
ON.
0324H tus of the sensor. When 2byte Bit0: Output1
(804)
responding bit is turned WORD Bit1: Output2*1
ON.
0325H Current 2byte
(805) Value intensity.
INT
0326H
- - - -
0327H system
(807)
light intensity before cor- 2byte
0328H
Raw Value rection with the Preset, R 0 to 65535
(808) UINT
functions.
(809) Value INT
(810) Value INT
032BH Reserved for
- - - -
(811) system

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
 : Default value

Indicates min value
among max values of
Peak-Hold received light intensity 2byte
032CH
(812) INT
violated.
Preset/ Indicates an internal set- 2byte
032DH
DATUM Inter- ting value when execut- R 0 to 65535
(813) UINT
nal Value ing preset/DATUM.
3 032EH
(814)
Display Cus-
tomize
tus of the Reading Cor-
rection function.
2byte
INT
R
1: Preset
2: Zero-shift
3: Work preset
4: Work preset (Reverse)
032FH Slide Switch Indicates status of the 2byte 0: Selecting 1ch
Communication
R
(815) Status Slide Switch. INT 1: Selecting 2ch
0330H Reserved for
- - - -
(816) system
0: RUN
0331H Operation Indicates current opera- 2byte 1: LED_OFF
R
(817) Mode tion mode of the sensor. INT 2: SLEEP
3: PAUSE
0: RUN 
0332H Operation Set up the operation 2byte 1: LED_OFF
R/W
(818) Mode Setting mode of the sensor. INT 2: SLEEP
3: PAUSE
0: Initialize 
1: Custom
Select Recipe to be used 2: Fall
0333H Recipe when executing operating 2byte 3: Percentage Calibration
R/W
(819) Select command (Load Recipe INT 4: Zero-shift
Data). 5: MEGA
6: AREA
7: 0 DATUM
0334H Counter Indicates the current 2byte
R 0 to 9999 (Default: 0)
(820) Value*1 counter value. INT
0335H
- - - -
033FH system
(831)
(832) count INT
Group 2.
Indicates setting value of
Setting Value Output 1. The upper limit
0341H 2byte
(Output1)/ of the setting value is dis- R/W 0 to 9999 (Default:50)
(833) INT
(Area High) played when the "Detec-
tion Mode" is Area.
Setting Value
(Output 2/ Indicates setting value of
0342H 2byte
Counter Set- Output 2 or counter set- R/W 0 to 9999 (Default: 50)
(834) INT
ting value.
ting Value)*1
0343H Reserved for
- - - -
(835) system
Indicates lower limit of
setting value in Area R/W 0 to 9999 (Default:50)
detection mode.

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
 : Default value

0345H
- - - -
0346H system
(838)
0347H Limit Setting warning output when the 2byte
(839) Value Limit Detection function is INT
used.
0348H
- - - -
034FH system
(847)
[Custom]
3
Group 2 R 14
Communication
Entry count
area.
[Custom]
"Setting Value (Output 1/
Area High)". Indicates the R/W
(849) (Output 1/ INT
Area High)
execution.
[Custom] "Setting Value (Output 2/
Setting Value
0352H
(Output 2/ Counter Setting Value)*1 2byte
R/W
(850) ". Indicates the value INT
Counter Set-
ting Value) from custom save execu-
tion.
0353H Reserved for
- - - -
(851) system
0354H 2byte
(852) INT
tion.
0355H
- - - -
0356H system
(854)
[Custom]
Limit Setting R/W
Value
0358H
- - - -
035FH system
(863)
Indicates number of
(864) count INT
Group 3.
0: Unlock 
0361H Key Lock Indicates status of the 2byte 1: Key Lock
R/W
(866) Key lock. INT

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
 : Default value

Slide Switch. When being
0363H Slide Switch locked, the Slide Switch 2byte 0: Unlock 
R/W
(867) Lock is disabled, with the value INT 1: Lock
always being "1ch".*2
bit0: Output1 
bit1: Output2*1
put2*1:L-on (N.O.)
Indicates that whether 1: Output1:D-on (N.C.)/Out-
0364H L-on/D-on 2byte
output is ON for light (L- R/W
put2*1:L-on (N.O.)
3 (868) (N.O./N.C.)
on) or ON (D-on) for dark.
INT
put2*1:D-on (N.C.)
3: Output1:D-on (N.C.)/Out-
put2*1:D-on (N.C.)
Communication
0: HIGH SPEED
(Response Time 80 s)
250 s)
0365H 2byte 500 s) 
Power Mode Indicates Power mode. R/W
(869) INT 3: SUPER (Response Time
1 ms)
4 ms)
16 ms)
0366H Sensitivity Indicates setting method 2byte ting 
R/W
(870) Setting of Sensitivity. INT 1: Percentage Calibration
0367H 2byte
(871) INT
Calibration.
0368H
- - - -
036FH system
(879)
[Custom]
Group 3 R 7
Entry count
area.
R/W
tom save execution.
R/W
execution.
[Custom]
Slide Switch R/W
Lock
tom save execution.

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
 : Default value

[Custom] L-
on/D-on R/W
(N.O./N.C.)
tom save execution.
R/W
save execution.
[Custom]
Sensitivity R/W
Setting
[Custom]
tom save execution.
3
Communication
Value
execution.
0378H
- - - -
037FH system
(895)
(896) count INT
Group 4.
0: Timer off 
0381H Output Timer Indicates settings of Out- 2byte 1: Off-delay Timer
R/W
(897) (Output1) put 1 timer. INT 2: On-delay Timer
3: One-shot Timer
0382H Timer Value Indicates time of Output 1 2byte
(898) (Output1) timer (unit: ms). INT
0383H Reserved for
- - - -
(899) system
1: DATUM1 Mode
2: DATUM2 Mode
Detection
0384H Indicates detection mode 2byte 3: Area Detection Mode
Mode (Out- R/W
(900) of Output 1. INT 4: Rising Edge Detection
put1)
Mode
Mode
0385H DATUM Indicates correction 2byte
(901) Speed speed of DATUM. INT
2: Level3 (Fast)
DATUM
0386H Indicates alarm output 2byte
(902) level of DATUM. INT
Level
0: Not use 
2: Preset
0387H External Indicates settings of 2byte 3: Zero-shift
R/W
(903) Input external input. INT 4: Reset
5: Transmission OFF
Set up the output status 0: Always OFF 
0388H 2byte
PAUSE Mode of the sensor in PAUSE R/W 1: Always ON
(904) INT

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
 : Default value

389H
- - - -
038FH system
(911)
[Custom]
Group 4 R 9
Entry count
area.
[Custom] "Output Timer (Output
0391H 2byte
Output Timer 1)". Indicates the value R/W
3 (913)
tion.
INT

[Custom]
0392H "Timer Value (Output 1)". 2byte
Communication
Timer Value R/W

(Output1)
0393H Reserved for
- - - -
(915) system
[Custom]
0394H Detection 2byte
put1)
tion.
[Custom]
DATUM R/W
Speed
tom save execution.
R/W
[Custom]
0397H "External Input". Indi- 2byte
External R/W
Input
tom save execution.
R/W
save execution.
0399H
- - - -
039FH system
(927)
(928) count INT
Group 5.
0: Timer off 
03A1H Output Timer Indicates settings of Out- 2byte 1: Off-delay Timer
R/W
(929) (Output2)*1 put 2 timer. INT 2: On-delay Timer
3: One-shot Timer
03A2H Timer Value Indicates time of Output 2 2byte
(930) (Output2)*1 timer (unit: ms). INT
03A3H Reserved for
- - - -
(931) system

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
 : Default value
Detection 0: Normal Detection Mode 

03A4H Mode (Out- Indicates detection mode 2byte 1: Limit Setting Output
R/W
(932) of Output 2. INT 2: Warning Output
put2)*1 3: Counter Output
03A5H Limit Output Indicates reset method of 2byte 0: Manual 
R/W
Counter 0: oVr1 
03A6H Indicates settings of 2byte
R/W 1: oVr2
(934) Type *1 counter type. INT 2: Auto
03A7H
03AFH
(943)
system
- - - -
3
[Custom] 2byte
03B0H entries that can be set in
Group 5 R 6
Communication
Entry count
area.
Custom area for "Output
[Custom]
03B1H Output Timer Timer (Output 2)*1". Indi- 2byte
R/W
(Output 2)*1
tom save execution.
[Custom]
03B2H Timer Value "Timer Value (Otput 2)*1". 2byte
R/W
(Output2)*1
03B3H Reserved for
- - - -
(947) system
[Custom]
03B4H Detection 2byte
(948) Mode (Out- 2)*1". Indicates the value INT
R/W
put2)*1
tion.
[Custom] 2byte
03B5H "Limit Output Mode". Indi-
Limit Output R/W
Mode
tom save execution.
03B6H [Custom] "Counter Type*1". Indicates 2byte
*1 R/W
(950) Counter Type the value from custom save INT
execution.
03B7H
- - - -
03BFH system
(959)
(960) count INT
Group 6.
03C1H Display Indicates settings of dis- 2byte 0: Normal 
R/W
(961) Reverse play reverse. INT 1: Reverse
0: None 
1: Extension
2: Bar
03C2H Indicates details of the 2byte 3: Excess Gain (%)
Sub Display R/W
(962) sub display. INT 4: Light Intensity HOLD
6: L-on/D-on
7: TAG Strings

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
 : Default value

0: Normal 
(963) INT Min.
selected in the Sub dis-
play.
Indicates that whether
the current value of
received light intensity is R/W
saturated when Preset or
3 03C5H
(965)
Preset Satu-
ration Level
Indicates saturation level
of Preset.
2byte
INT
R/W 100 to 200 (Default:110)
03C6H Current Dis- 2byte 0: Normal 

Indicates current display. R/W
(966) play INT 1: Sub
Communication
03C7H Preset Dis- Indicates settings of Pre- 2byte 0: Preset 

R/W
(967) play set Display. INT 1: Area
03C8H
- - - -
03CFH system
(975)
[Custom]
03D0H entries that can be set in 2byte
Group 6 R 7
Entry count
area.
R/W
tom save execution.
R/W
save execution.
R/W
save execution.
[Custom]
Preset Satu- R/W
ration
tom save execution.
[Custom]
Preset Satu- R/W
ration Level
[Custom]
Current Dis- R/W
play
tom save execution.
[Custom]
03D7H "Preset Display". Indi- 2byte
Preset Dis- R/W
play
tom save execution.
03D8H
- - - -
03DFH system
(991)

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
 : Default value

(992) count INT
be set in Group 7.
Indicates settings of dis-
abling warning function.
When the bit is ON, the R/W Bit0: Limit Detection
(993) able WORD
corresponding warning
not occur.
03E2H Indicates TAG character 8 characters or less
(994) string. (Default : "")
03E3H
(995) to
03E5H
Reserved for
system
- - - - 3
(997)
0: OFF 
Communication
03E6H 2byte 1: ON
Power Save tus of power save func- R/W
(998) INT 2: FULL
tion.
3: ALL
03E7H Reserved for
- - - -
(999) system
03E8H Indicates display gain 2byte 0: Standard 
Display Gain R/W
(1000) setting. INT 1: Full
R/W
doubled.
the Preset/Zero-shift set-
Parameter
Save by Ext- R/W
Input
external input.
03EBH 2byte 0: Standard 
Sensitivity Set up the Sensitivity. R/W
(1003) INT 1: High Resolution
03ECH
- - - -
03EFH system
(1007)
[Custom]
03F0H entries that can be set in 2byte
Group 7 R 11
Entry count
area.
[Custom]
Warning Dis- R/W
able
tom save execution.
STRING R/W
save execution.
03F3H
- - - -
03F5H system
(1013)
R/W
save execution.

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
 : Default value

03F7H Reserved for
- - - -
(1015) system
R/W
save execution.
[Custom]
Interference R/W
Prevention
3 03FAH
(1018)
[Custom]
Parameter
Save by Ext-
input". Indicates the value
2byte
INT
R/W
Input
tion.
Communication

03FBH [Custom] "Sensitivity". 2byte
R/W
(1019) Sensitivity Indicates the value from INT
03FCH
- - - -
03FFH system
(1023)
(1024) count INT
be set in Group 8.
0401H ID number Indicates number of used 2byte (LV-N10/N12C*) 1
R
(1025) Count IDs. INT (LV-N12*) 2
1: LV-S71
2: LV-S61
3: LV-S72
4: LV-S62
5: LV-S41/LV-S41L
0402H Indicates connected 2byte 6: LV-S31
Head Type R
(1026) head type. INT 8: LV-S63
9: LV-NH37/NH42
10: LV-NH32/NH35
11: LV-NH100/NH110
12: LV-NH300
13: LV-NH62
0403H Reserved for
- - - -
(1027) system
0404H Product 2byte (LV-N10/N12C*) 2003
Indicates product code. R
(1028) Code INT (LV-N12) 2004
Indicates revision, with the
upper bytes representing
0405H 2byte
Revision the major revision and the R 0101H to FFFFH
(1029) INT
the minor revision.
(LV-N10/N12C*) "LV-N10/
STRING R N12C*"
(LV-N12*) "LV-N12*"
0407H
- - - -
040DH system
(1037)
040EH 2byte (LV-N10/N12C*) 2003
Series Code Indicates series code. R
(1038) INT (LV-N12) 2004

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C
 : Default value

(1039) sion INT
0410H 2byte
(1040) INT
0411H
- - - -
041FH system
(1055)
*1 Cable type only

*2 If the slide type DIP switch is set to MEGA/2 while locked, [()] will flash
on the sensor amplifier. 3
• [Custom]*** is a parameter can save and read settings using the LV-N10
Communication
Reference
series "custom save" and "user reset function".
• "Entry count" indicates the number of parameters in the same group.

3-5 Parameter List
LV-N10/N12/N12C


Load Recipe
0301H(769) Reads the recipe.
Data
Maximum Sensi-
3 0303H(771)
tivity Calibration
Executes calibration at the maximum sensitivity.

0304H(772)
Communication
bration tivity.
Two-point/Pos. Starts calibration the 1st point of 2-point calibra-
0305H(773)
Calibration: 1st tion.
0306H(774)
0305H(773)
0307H(775)
Full Auto Calibra-
tion: Start
Full Auto Calibra-
tion: Finish
Zero-shift
Request
030BH(779) Zero-shift Cancel Cancels zero shift.
Reset Hold
Value
Work-Preset
Request
0312H(786)
Start preset.
0313H(787)
Finish preset.
0314H(788) tivity Preset: can be executed without specifying the start and
Request end.)
Reset Counter
0315H (789) Resets the counter value. (Cable type only)
Value

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12
PS-N10/N12 (Instance ID: 1 to 16)
 : Default value

R 22
Indicates error information.

Bit1: Sensor-Head Error
Bit2: EEPROM Error
Bit3: Reserve
3
0321H Error Infor- When an error occurs, the 2byte Bit4: Reserve
(801) mation corresponding bit is turned WORD
Communication
ON. Error
Bit6: Reserve
tion Error
ON.
0324H 2byte
Output the output is ON, the cor- R Bit0: Output
(804) responding bit is turned WORD
ON.
0325H Current 2byte
(805) Value INT
intensity.
0326H
- - - -
0327H system
(807)
light intensity before cor- 2byte
0328H
Raw Value rection with the Preset, R 0 to 65535
(808) UINT
functions.
(809) Value INT
(810) Value INT
032BH Reserved for
- - - -
(811) system

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12
 : Default value

Indicates min value among
max values of received
Peak-Hold 2byte
032CH light intensity during the
Minimum R 0 to 9999
(812) time period when the set- INT
Value
ting value of received light
intensity is violated.
Preset/ Indicates an internal set- 2byte
032DH
DATUM Inter- ting value when execut- R 0 to 65535
(813) UINT
nal Value ing preset/DATUM.
Indicates operating sta- 2byte
1: Preset
032EH Display Cus-
3 (814) tomize
tus of the Reading Cor-
rection function.
INT
R 2: Zero-shift
3: Work preset
4: Work preset (Reverse)
032FH Slide Switch Indicates status of the 2byte 0: Selecting ch
R
(815) Status Slide Switch. INT 1: Selecting ch
Communication
0330H Reserved for

- - - -
(816) system
0: RUN
0331H Operation Indicates current opera- 2byte 1: LED_OFF
R
(817) Mode tion mode of the sensor. INT 2: SLEEP
3: PAUSE
0: RUN 
0332H Operation Set up the operation 2byte 1: LED_OFF
R/W
(818) Mode Setting mode of the sensor. INT 2: SLEEP
3: PAUSE
0: Initialize 
1: Custom
Select Recipe to be used 2: Fall
0333H Recipe when executing operating 2byte 3: Percentage Calibration
R/W
(819) Select command (Load Recipe INT 4: Zero-shift
Data). 5: MEGA
6: AREA
7: 0 DATUM
0334H
- - - -
033FH system
(831)
(832) count INT
Group 2.
Setting Value Output. The upper limit of
0341H 2byte
(Output/Area the setting value is dis- R/W 0 to 9999 (Default:50)
(833) INT
High) played when the "Detec-
tion Mode" is Area.
0342H
- - - -
0343H system
(835)
Indicates lower limit of
setting value in Area R/W 0 to 9999 (Default:50)
detection mode.
0345H
- - - -
0346H system
(838)

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12
 : Default value

0347H Limit Setting warning output when the 2byte
(839) Value Limit Detection function is INT
used.
0348H
- - - -
034FH system
(847)
[Custom]
Group 2 R 14
Entry count
[Custom]
area.
3
"Setting Value (Output/
Area High)". Indicates the R/W
Communication
(849) (Output/Area INT
High)
execution.
0352H
- - - -
0353H system
(851)
0354H 2byte
(852) INT
tion.
0355H
- - - -
0356H system
(854)
[Custom]
Limit Setting R/W
Value
0358H
- - - -
035FH system
(863)
Indicates number of
(864) count INT
Group 3.
0: Unlock 
0361H Key Lock Indicates status of the 2byte 1: Key Lock
R/W
(866) Key lock. INT
Slide Switch. When being
(867) Lock INT 1: Lock
always being.*1
0364H L-on/D-on 2byte 0: L-on (N.O.)
output is ON for light (L- R/W
(868) (N.O./N.C.) INT 1: D-on (N.C.)
on) or ON (D-on) for dark.

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12
 : Default value

500 s) 
3: SUPER (Response Time
0365H 2byte 1 ms)
Power Mode Indicates Power mode. R/W
(869) INT 4: ULTRA (Response Time
4 ms)
16 ms)
0366H Sensitivity Indicates setting method 2byte ting
R/W
(870) Setting of Sensitivity. INT 1: Percentage Calibration
3 Indicates target value of


0367H 2byte
(871) INT
Communication

Calibration.
0368H
- - - -
036FH system
(879)
[Custom]
Group 3 R 7
Entry count
area.
R/W
tom save execution.
R/W
execution.
[Custom]
Slide Switch R/W
Lock
tom save execution.
[Custom] L-
on/D-on R/W
(N.O./N.C.)
tom save execution.
R/W
save execution.
[Custom]
Sensitivity R/W
Setting
tom save execution.
[Custom]
Value
execution.
0378H
- - - -
037FH system
(895)

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12
 : Default value

(896) count INT
Group 4.
0: Timer off 
0381H Indicates settings of Out- 2byte 1: Off-delay Timer
Output Timer R/W
(897) put timer. INT 2: On-delay Timer
3: One-shot Timer
0382H Indicates time of Output 2byte
Timer Value R/W 1 to 9999 (Default: 10)
(898) timer (unit: ms). INT
0383H Reserved for
- - - -
(899) system
1: DATUM1 Mode
3
2: DATUM2 Mode
Communication
0384H Detection Indicates detection mode 2byte 3: Area Detection Mode
R/W
(900) Mode of Output. INT 4: Rising Edge Detection
Mode
Mode
0385H DATUM Indicates correction 2byte
(901) Speed speed of DATUM. INT
2: Level3 (Fast)
DATUM
0386H Indicates alarm output 2byte
(902) level of DATUM. INT
Level
0: Not use 
2: Preset
0387H External Indicates settings of 2byte 3: Zero-shift
R/W
(903) Input external input. INT 4: Reset
5: Transmission OFF
Set up the output status 0: Always OFF 
0388H 2byte
PAUSE Mode of the sensor in PAUSE R/W 1: Always ON
(904) INT
389H
- - - -
038FH system
(911)
[Custom]
Group 4 R 9
Entry count
area.
0391H [Custom] "Output Timer". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(913) Output Timer the value from custom INT
save execution.
0392H [Custom] "Timer Value". Indicates 2byte
R/W
(914) Timer Value the value from custom INT
save execution.
0393H Reserved for
- - - -
(915) system
[Custom]
0394H "Detection Mode". Indi- 2byte
Detection R/W
Mode
tom save execution.

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12
 : Default value

[Custom]
DATUM R/W
Speed
tom save execution.
R/W
[Custom]
0397H "External Input". Indi- 2byte
External R/W
3 Input
tom save execution.
R/W
Communication
save execution.
0399H
- - - -
039FH system
(927)
(928) count INT
Group 5.
03A1H
- - - -
03A4H system
(932)
03A5H Limit Output Indicates reset method of 2byte 0: Manual
R/W
03A6H
- - - -
03AFH system
(943)
[Custom]
03B0H entries that can be set in 2byte
Group 5 R 6
Entry count
area.
03B1H
- - - -
03B4H system
(948)
[Custom]
Limit Output R/W
Mode
tom save execution.
03B6H
- - - -
03BFH system
(959)
(960) count INT
Group 6.
03C1H Display Indicates settings of dis- 2byte 0: Normal 
R/W
(961) Reverse play reverse. INT 1: Reverse

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12
 : Default value

0: None 
1: Extension
2: Bar
03C2H Indicates details of the 2byte 3: Excess Gain (%)
Sub Display R/W
(962) sub display. INT 4: Light Intensity HOLD
6: L-on/D-on
7: TAG Strings
0: Normal 
(963)
selected in the Sub dis-
play.
INT Min.
3
Communication
the current value of
received light intensity is R/W
saturated when Preset or
03C5H Preset Satu- Indicates saturation level 2byte
R/W 100 to 200 (Default:110)
(965) ration Level of Preset. INT
03C6H Current Dis- 2byte 0: Normal 
Indicates current display. R/W
(966) play INT 1: Sub
03C7H
- - - -
03CFH system
(975)
03D0H 2byte
Group 6 entries that can be set in R 6
(976) INT
Entry count Group 6 custom save area.
R/W
tom save execution.
R/W
save execution.
R/W
save execution.
[Custom]
Preset Satu- R/W
ration
tom save execution.
[Custom]
Preset Satu- R/W
ration Level
[Custom]
Current Dis- R/W
play
tom save execution.
03D7H
- - - -
03DFH system
(991)

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12
 : Default value

(992) count INT
be set in Group 7.
Indicates settings of dis-
abling warning function.
When the bit is ON, the R/W Bit0: Limit Detection
(993) able WORD
corresponding warning
not occur.
03E2H Indicates TAG character 8 characters or less
(994) string. (Default : "")
03E3H
3 (995) to
03E5H
Reserved for
system
- - - -
(997)
0: OFF 
Communication

03E6H 2byte 1: ON
Power Save tus of power save func- R/W
(998) INT 2: FULL
tion.
3: ALL
03E7H Reserved for
- - - -
(999) system
03E8H Indicates display gain 2byte 0: Standard 
Display Gain R/W
(1000) setting. INT 1: Full
R/W
doubled.
the Preset/Zero-shift set-
Parameter
Save by Ext- R/W
Input
external input.
03EBH Reserved for
- - - -
(1003) system
The setting status of the
03ECH Long Dis- 2byte 0: OFF 
long distance mode is R/W
(1004) tance Mode INT 1: ON
stored.
03EDH
- - - -
03EFH system
(1007)
[Custom]
03F0H entries that can be set in 2byte
Group 7 R 13
Entry count
area.
[Custom]
Warning Dis- R/W
able
tom save execution.
STRING R/W
save execution.
03F3H
- - - -
03F5H system
(1013)

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12
 : Default value

R/W
save execution.
03F7H Reserved for
- - - -
(1015) system
R/W
save execution.
03F9H
(1017)
[Custom]
Interference
Prevention
"Interference Prevention".
2byte
INT
R/W 3
Communication
[Custom]
Input
tion.
03FBH Reserved for
- - - -
(1019) system
[Custom] “Long Distance Mode”
03FCH 2byte
Long Dis- The value when the cus- R/W
(1020) INT
tance Mode tom save is performed is
stored.
03FDH
- - - -
03FFH system
(1023)
(1024) count INT
be set in Group 8.
R 1
0402H
- - - -
0403H system
(1027)
0404H Product 2byte
(1028) Code INT
0405H senting the major revision 2byte
(1029) and the lower bytes rep- INT
resenting the minor revi-
sion.
STRING R PS-N10/N12*
0407H
- - - -
040DH system
(1037)
040EH 2byte
(1038) INT
(1039) sion INT

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12
 : Default value

0410H 2byte
(1040) INT
0411H
- - - -
041FH system
(1055)
*1 If the slide type DIP switch is set to MEGA while locked, [] will flash on the
sensor amplifier.
3 Reference
• [Custom]*** is a parameter can save and read settings using the PS-N10
series "custom save" and "user reset function".
• "Entry count" indicates the number of parameters in the same group.
Communication

3-5 Parameter List
PS-N10/N12


Load Recipe
0301H(769) Reads the recipe.
Data
Maximum Sensi-
0303H(771)
tivity Calibration
Executes calibration at the maximum sensitivity. 3
0304H(772)
Communication
bration tivity.
Two-point/Pos. Starts calibration the 1st point of 2-point calibra-
0305H(773)
Calibration: 1st tion.
0306H(774)
0305H(773)
0307H(775)
Full Auto Calibra-
tion: Start
Full Auto Calibra-
tion: Finish
Zero-shift
Request
Reset Hold
Value
Work-Preset
Request
0312H(786)
Start preset.
0313H(787)
Finish preset.
0314H(788) tivity Preset: can be executed without specifying the start and
Request end.)

3-5 Parameter List
AP-N10/N10D
AP-N10/N10D (Instance ID: 1 to 16)
 : Default value

(800) count UINT
Group1.
3 Indicates error
bit0 : Reserve
bit1 : Sensor-Head Error
bit2 : EEPROM Error
information. When an bit3 : Reserve
0321H Error 2byte
Communication
error occurs, the R bit4 : Reserve

(801) Information WORD
corresponding bit is bit5 : Reserve
turned ON. bit6 : Reserve
bit7 : Sensor Communica-
tion Error
0322H
Reserved - - - -
(802)
0323H
Reserved - - - -
(803)
Indicates the output
status of the sensor. bit0 : Output 1
0324H 2byte
Output When the output is ON, R
(804)
the corresponding bit is
WORD bit1 : Output 2*1
turned ON.
Current
0325H Indicates the current
Pressure 2byte INT R -32768~32767
(805) pressure value.
Value
0326H
Reserved - - - -
(806)
0327H
Reserved - - - -
(807)
Indicates the pressure
Raw
0328H value of pressure without
Pressure 2byte INT R -32768~32767
(808) zero shift.
Value
(unit: 0.1kPa)
0329H Peak-Hold
of the current values. 2byte INT R -32768~32767
(809) Value
(unit: 0.1kPa)
Indicates the bottom
032AH Bottom-Hold
value of the current 2byte INT R -32768~32767
(810) Value
values.(unit: 0.1kPa)
Indicates the max value
among the bottom
032BH Bottom-Peak pressure values while the
2byte INT R -32768~32767
(811) Value*1 current value falls the
setting value (P2).
(unit: 0.1kPa)
Indicates the minimum
value among the peak
032CH Peak-Bottom pressure values while the
2byte INT R -32768~32767
(812) Value current value exceeds the
setting value (P1).
(unit: 0.1kPa)

3-5 Parameter List
AP-N10/N10D
 : Default value

032DH
(813)
to Reserved - - - -
033FH
(831)
0340H Group 2 2byte
(832) Entry count UINT
Group 2.
▌AP-41M/41
-1200~200
(default value : -500)

▌AP-43
-2000~12000 3
0341H Setting Value value of Output1. (Except (default value : 5000)
2byte INT R/W
(833) P1 for the Window mode) ▌AP-44
Communication
(unit: 0.1kPa) -1400~1400
▌AP-48
-1400~1400
(default value : 500)
▌AP-41M/41
-1200~200
▌AP-43
Indicates the setting -2000~12000
0342H Setting Value value of Output1. (default value : -500)
2byte INT R/W
(834) P2*1 (Standard mode) ▌AP-44
(unit: 0.1kPa) -1400~1400
▌AP-48
-1400~1400
0343H
Reserved - - - -
(835)
▌AP-41M/41
-1200~200
▌AP-43
Indicates the upper limit
-2000~12000
of the setting value.
0344H Setting Value (default value : 6000)
(Window mode, Leak test 2byte INT R/W
(836) Area Hi ▌AP-44
mode)
-1400~1400
(unit: 0.1kPa)
▌AP-48
-1400~1400
▌AP-41M/41
-1200~200
▌AP-43
-2000~12000
of the setting value.
0345H Setting Value (default value : 2000)
(Window mode, Leak test 2byte INT R/W
(837) Area Lo ▌AP-44
mode)
-1400~1400
(unit: 0.1kPa)
▌AP-48
-1400~1400
0346H
Reserved - - - -
(838)

3-5 Parameter List
AP-N10/N10D
 : Default value

0347H
Reserved - - - -
(839)
▌AP-41M/41
0~1000 (default value : 5)
Indicates the hysteresis ▌AP-43
0348H
Hysteresis value. 2byte INT R/W 0~10000
(840)
(unit: 0.1kPa) (default value : 50)
▌AP-44/48
0~1999 (default value : 10)
0349H
(841)
3 to
034DH
Reserved - - - -
(845)
▌AP-41M/41
Communication
-1013~30
Indicates the zero shift
034EH Reference ▌AP-43
reference value. 2byte INT R/W
(846) Value -300~10000
(unit: 0.1kPa)
▌AP-44/48
-1013~1013
▌AP-41M/41
Indicates the atmosphere -60~60
Pressure
034FH pressure correction ▌AP-43
Correction 2byte INT R/W
(847) value. -600~600
Value
(unit: 0.1kPa) ▌AP-44/48
-110~110
0350H
(848)
to Reserved - - - -
035FH
(863)
0360H Group 3 2byte
Group 3.
0 : Unlock 
0361H Key Lock Indicates the status of 1 : Key Lock
2byte INT R/W
(865) Status Key lock. 2 : PIN Code Lock
3 : Communication Lock
0362H Indicates the password
Password 2byte INT R/W 0 to 9999 (default vaule : 0)
(866) for Key lock.
0363H
Reserved - - - -
(867)
bit0 : Output 1
0 : N.O.
Indicates whether the 1 : N.C.
0364H outputs are NO or NC. 2byte
(868)
N.O./N.C.
The corresponding bit WORD
R/W bit1 : Output 2*1
turns ON in NC. 0 : N.O.
1 : N.C.
(default value : 0)
0 : 1ms
1 : 2.5ms 
Response
2 : 5ms
0365H Time Indicates the response
2byte INT R/W 3 : 100ms
(869) (Chatter time (chatter prevention).
4 : 500ms
prevention)
5 : 1000ms
6 : 5000ms

3-5 Parameter List
AP-N10/N10D
 : Default value

0366H
(870)
to Reserved - - - -
036EH
(878)
Indicates the selected
output. When the
036FH Switching calibration is executed, 0 : Output1 
2byte INT R/W
(879) Out1/Out2*1 the setting value of the 1 : Output2
selected output is
changed.
0370H
(880) 3
to Reserved - - - -
037FH
Communication
(895)
0380H Group 4 2byte
Group 4.
0381H
(897)
to Reserved - - - -
0383H
(899)
0 : Standard Mode 
1 : Window Mode
0384H Detection Indicates the detection 2 : Suction Confirmation
2byte INT R/W
(900) Mode mode.
Mode*1
3 : Leak Test Mode*1
0385H
(901)
to Reserved - - - -
039FH
(927)
03A0H Group 5 2byte
Group 5.
03A1H
(929)
to Reserved - - - -
03BFH
(959)
03C0H Group 6 2byte
Group 6.
03C1H
(961)
to Reserved - - - -
03CCH
(972)
03CDH Display Indicates the display 0 : Standard 
2byte INT R/W
(973) resolution resolution setting. 1 : High Resolution Mode
03CEH
(974)
to Reserved - - - -
03DFH
(991)

3-5 Parameter List
AP-N10/N10D
 : Default value

03E0H Group 7 2byte
Group 7.
03E1H
(993)
to Reserved - - - -
03E5H
(997)
03E6H 0 : Off 
Eco Mode Indicates the Eco mode. 2byte INT R/W
(998) 1 : On
03E7H
3 (999)
to Reserved - - - -
03FFH
(1023)
Communication

0400H Group 8 2byte
Group 8.
0401H ID Number Indicates the number of 2byte AP-N10 : 1
R
(1025) Count used IDs. INT AP-N10D : 2
1 : AP-48
0402H Indicates the connected 2byte 2 : AP-41/41M
Head Type R
(1026) head type. INT 3 : AP-43
4 : AP-44
0403H
Reserved - - - -
(1027)
0404H Product Indicates the product 2byte AP-N10 : 2020
R
(1028) Code code. INT AP-N10D : 2021
Indicates the revision,
with the upper bytes
0405H representing the major 2byte
Revision R 0 to FFFFh
(1029) revision and the lower INT
minor revision.
Indicates the model
0406H Product
designation of the STRING R AP
(1030) Name 1,0
sensor.
0407H
(1031)
to Reserved - - - -
040DH
(1037)
040EH 2byte AP-N10 : 2020
Series Code Indicates the series code. R
(1038) INT AP-N10D : 2021
040FH Series Indicates the series 2byte
R 1
(1039) Version version. INT
0410H 2byte
Device Type Indicates the device type. R 0
(1040) INT
0411H
(1041)
to Reserved - - - -
041FH
(1055)
*1 2-output type only

3-5 Parameter List
AP-N10/N10D


Initialization
0301H(769) Initializes all settings.
request
Two-point/Pos. Starts calibration the 1st point of 2-point
0305H(773)
Calibration: 1st calibration.
0306H(774)
Two-point Starts calibration the 2nd point of 2-point 3
Calibration: 2nd calibration.
Communication
Atmosphere
030EH(782) Pressure Executes the atmosphere pressure correction.
Correction
Reset
Atmosphere
030FH(783) Resets the atmosphere pressure correction.
Pressure
Correction
Reset Hold
0310H(784) Resets the hold value.
Value

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-T
MU-N/LR-T (Instance ID : 1 to 16)
When the MU-N/LR-T is used for the first time after purchase, initial setting should be
completed by either of the following methods:
(1) By operating the button of the MU-N
(2) Via communication
3 Point When the settings of the MU-N and LR-T are different (such as when
only the LR-T is replaced), the settings must be synchronized by but-
Communication
ton operation of the MU-N. For details, refer to "MU-N Series User's
Manual (Using LR-T)".
 Initial setting via communication

Rewriting one of the sensor settings via message communication completes the initial
setting and the sensor enters detection status. Change the "Basic settings" and other
settings as necessary. The "Basic settings" can be changed using the following proce-
dure.
1 Set the function to be changed.
Write the data to the following address of the MU-N/LR-T.

Attribute Data
Name Description Attribute Value
ID type
bit0 : NPN/PNP
0 : NPN
1 : PNP
bit1 : I/O Function
Output 1+Output 2
03EFH Indicates the changes of 2byte
Basic setting changes R/W Outupt 1+Input
(1007) "Basic settings". INT
bit2-3 : Distance Unit
0 : mm
1 : inch
2 : feet
(Default value : 0)
2 Apply the function to the sensor.
An operation command is issued to the following address.

(Service code: 4BH, Instance ID: 01H to 10H)
Attribute
Name Description
ID
0302H Basic settings set

Changes the "Basic settings" in accordance with "Basic settings changes".
(770) request

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-T
Reference
To check the input/output function being set, read the data from Attribute ID
: 0335H "Basic settings".
This completes the "basic settings". Refer to starting on the next page to perform
communication.
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type

0320H 2byte
Group1 Entry count entries that can be set in R 25
(800) UNIT
Group1.
bit0 : Over Current Error
3
bit1 : Head Error
bit2 : EEPROM Error
Communication
Indicates error informa-
bit3 : Reserved
0321H tion. When an error 2byte
Error Information R bit4 : Reserved
(801) occurs, the correspond- WORD
bit5 : Reserved
bit6 : Sensor/Controller
Unsynchronized
bit7 : Communication Error
0322H
(802) to
Reserved - - - -
0323H
(803)
0324H 2byte bit0 : Output1
(804) WORD bit1 : Output2
ON.
Indicates the raw value of
0325H 2byte
Current Distance the current distance R 50 to 9999
(805) INT
value.
0326H
(806) to
Reserved - - - -
0327H
(807)
Indicates the raw value of
0328H 2byte 0 : Low (instability)
Light Intensity the current distance R
(808) INT 1 : High
value.
0329H
(809) to
Reserved - - - -
0334H
(820)
bit0 : NPN/PNP
0 : NPN
1 : PNP
0335H Indicates the basic set- 2byte
Basic setting R bit1 : I/O Function
(821) tings of the sensor. INT
0 : Output 1 + Output 2
1 : Output 1 + Input
(Default value : 0)
0336H
(822) to
Reserved - - - -
0338H
(824)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-T
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0 : IDLE
0339H Indicates status of Initial- 2byte
Initialization status R 1 : EXE
(825) ization request. INT
2 : FINISH
033AH
(826) to
Reserved - - - -
033FH
(831)
0340H 2byte
3 (832)
Group2.
UINT
value of Output1. The

Communication
0341H Setting Value(Output1 / lower limit of the setting 2byte 0 to 9999 (Default vaule :
R/W
(833) Output1 Area Near) value is displayed when INT 500)
the "Detection Mode" is
Area.
0342H Setting Value(Output2 / lower limit of the setting 2byte 0 to 9999 (Default vaule :
R/W
(834) Output2 Area Near) value is displayed when INT 500)
Area.
0343H
Reserved - - - -
(835)
0344H Setting Value(Output1 of setting value of Out- 2byte 0 to 9999 (Default vaule :
R/W
(836) Area Far) put1 when the "Detection INT 1000)
Mode" is Area.
0345H Setting Value(Output2 of setting value of Out- 2byte 0 to 9999 (Default vaule :
R/W
(837) Area Far) put2 when the "Detection INT 1000)
Mode" is Area.
0346H
(838) to
Reserved - - - -
0347H
(839)
Indicates the value of
0348H 2byte 0 to 9999 (Default vaule :
Hysteresis Value hysteresis when Hystere- R/W
(840) UINT 10)
sis Setting is "Custom".
0349H
(841) to
Reserved - - - -
034EH
(846)
034FH Indicates the offset value 2byte
DATUM Offset R/W 0 to 9999 (Default vaule : 0)
(847) in DATUM mode. INT
0350H
(848) to
Reserved - - - -
035FH
(863)
0360H 2byte
(864) INT
Group3.

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-T
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0 : Unlock 
0361H Indicates the status of 2byte 1 : Key Lock
Key Lock Status R/W
(865) Key lock. INT 2 : PIN Code Lock
Password R/W 0 to 9999 (Default vaule : 0)
0363H
Reserved - - - -
(867)

bit0 : Output 1
0 : N.O.
1 : N.C.
3
0364H logic(NO/NC). The corre- 2byte
N.O./N.C. R/W bit1 : Output 2
(868) sponding bit turns ON in WORD
Communication
0 : N.O.
NC.
1 : N.C.
(Default value : 0)
Laser Class2 type
0 : 7ms
1 : 15ms
2 : 30ms 
3 : 105ms
0365H Indicates the Response 2byte 4 : 1000ms
Response Time R/W
(869) Time. INT Laser Class1 type
0 : 8ms
1 : 25ms
2 : 55ms 
3 : 205ms
4 : 2000ms
0366H
(870) to
Reserved - - - -
0368H
(872)
0369H Indicates the setting 2byte 0 : Standard 
Hysteresis Setting R/W
(873) mode of hysteresis. INT 1 : Custom
036AH
Reserved - - - -
(874)
036BH Indicates the detection 2byte 0 : Distance mode 
Detection Mode R/W
(875) mode. INT 1 : DATUM mode
0 : Channel 1 
Indicates the laser emis-
036CH 2byte 1 : Channel 2
Interference Channel sion channel for interfer- R/W
(876) INT 2 : Channel 3
ence prevention.
3 : Channel 4
0 : Low
036DH Received Light Sensi- Indicates the received 2byte
R/W 1 : Mid
(877) tivity light sensitivity setting. INT
2 : High 
036EH 2byte
Stability Filter samples used when R/W 1 to 100 (Default vaule : 5)
(878) INT
determining stability.
036FH Indicates the selected 2byte 0 : Output1 
Switching Out1/Out2 R/W
(879) output. INT 1 : Output2
0370H
(880) to
Reserved - - - -
037FH
(895)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-T
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type

0380H 2byte
(896) UINT
Group4.
0 : Off 
0381H Indicates the setting of 2byte 1 : Off delay
Output Timer (Output1) R/W
(897) Output1 timer. INT 2 : On delay
3 : One-shot
0382H Indicates the time of Out- 2byte 1 to 9999 (Default value :
Timer Value (Output1) R/W
(898) put1 timer. (unit: ms). INT 10)
3 0383H
(899)
Reserved - - - -
0384H Indicates the mode of 2byte 0 : Standard 

Communication
Output 1 Mode R/W

(900) Output 1. INT 1 : Window
0385H
(901) to
Reserved - - - -
0386H
(902)
0 : Off 
0387H Indicates the settings of 2byte
External Input Function R/W 1 : Calibration input
(903) the external input. INT
2 : LED Off
0388H
(904) to
Reserved - - - -
039FH
(927)
03A0H 2byte
(928) UINT
Group5.
0 : Off 
03A1H Indicates the setting of 2byte 1 : Off delay
Output Timer (Output2) R/W
(929) Output2 timer. INT 2 : On delay
3 : One-shot
03A2H Indicates the time of Out- 2byte 1 to 9999 (Default value :
Timer Value (Output2) R/W
(930) put2 timer (unit: ms). INT 10)
03A3H
Reserved - - - -
(931)
0 : Standard
03A4H Indicates the mode of 2byte 1 : Window
Output 2 Mode R/W
(932) Output 2. INT 2 : Stability 
3 : Error
03A5H
(933) to
Reserved - - - -
03ADH
(941)
03AEH Indicates the output hold 2byte 0 : Off 
Output Hold R/W
(942) setting. INT 1 : On
03AFH Indicates the laser emis- 2byte 0 : Off
Laser On/Off R/W
(943) sion ON/OFF status. INT 1 : On 
03B0H
(944) to
Reserved - - - -
03BFH
(959)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-T
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type

03C0H 2byte
(960) INT
Group6.
03C1H
(961) to
Reserved - - - -
03C5H
(965)
0 : Current value / Setting
value 
03C6H
(966)
Display Screen (Sen-
sor)
display screen of the
sensor.
2byte
INT
R/W
1 : Peak value / Bottom
value
3
2 : Current value / Bar
3 : Current value
Communication
03C7H
(967) to
Reserved - - - -
03CEH
(974)
03CFH Indicates Graphic mode 2byte 0 : On Trigger
Graphic Mode R/W
(975) setting. INT 1 : Trend Graph 
03D0H
(976) to
Reserved - - - -
03DFH
(991)
03E0H 2byte
(992) INT
Group7.
03E1H
(993) to
Reserved - - - -
03E5H
(997)
0 : 100%
03E6H Indicates screen bright- 2byte
Brightness R/W 1 : OFF
(998) ness. INT
2 : 30% 
03E7H
(999) to
Reserved - - - -
03EAH
(1002)
03EBH
User Tag0
(1003)
Indicates User Tag.Avail-
03ECH 2byte
User Tag1 able as an area to put R/W 0 to FFFFh
(1004) UINT
optional data.
03EDH
User Tag2
(1005)
03EEH
Reserved - - - -
(1006)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
bit0 : NPN/PNP
0 : NPN
1 : PNP
bit1 : I/O Function
Output 1+Output 2
Basic setting changes R/W Outupt 1+Input
(1007) "Basic setting". INT
bit2-3 : Distance Unit
0 : mm
1 : inch
2 : feet
3 03F0H
(Default value : 0)
(1008)
to Reserved - - - -
Communication
03FFH
(1023)
0400H 2byte
(1024) UINT
Group8.
0401H Indicates the number of 2byte
ID Number Count R 3
(1025) used IDs. INT
0402H
Reserved - - - -
(1026)
Indicates Multi Controller
revisions, with the upper
0403H Multi Controller Revi- bytes representing the 2byte
R 0 to FFFFh
(1027) sion major revisions and the INT
the minor revisions.
0404H Indicates the product 2byte
Product Code R 2012
(1028) code. INT
Indicates Sensor revi-
sions, with the upper
0405H bytes representing the 2byte
Sensor Revision R 0 to FFFFh
(1029) major revisions and the INT
0406H Indicates the model des- STRIN
Product Name R "LR-T**"
(1030) ignation of the sensor. G
0407H
(1031)
to Reserved - - - -
040DH
(1037)
040EH 2byte
Series Code Indicates the series code. R 2012
(1038) INT
040FH Indicates the series ver- 2byte
Series Version R 1
(1039) sion. INT
0410H 2byte
(1040) INT

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0411H
(1041)
to Reserved - - - -
041FH
(1055)

3
Communication
Attribute
Name Description
ID
0301H
Initialization request Initializes all settings, except for "Basic setting".
(769)
0302H Basic setting set
Changes the "Basic setting" in accordance with "Basic setting changes"
(770) request
0303H
1-Point Calibration Executes 1-point calibration.
(771)
0305H
2-Point Calibration (1st) Starts calibration: the 1st point of 2-point calibration.
(773)
0306H 2-Point Calibration
Starts calibration: the 2nd point of 2-point calibration.
(774) (2nd)
0308H Full Auto Calibration
Starts Full auto calibration.
(776) start
0309H Full Auto Calibration
Ends Full auto calibration.
(777) end
031EH
DATUM Preset Executes reference surface update.
(798)
031FH
DATUM Calibration Executes DATUM Calibration
(799)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
MU-N/LR-W (Instance ID: 1 to 16)
When the MU-N/LR-W is used for the first time after the purchase, the initial setting
should be completed in either of the following methods:
3
Point When the settings of the MU-N and LR-W are different (such as when
Communication
only the LR-W is replaced), the settings must be synchronized with

the button operation of the MU-N. For details, refer to "MU-N Series
User's Manual (LR-W500 Edition)".

Rewriting one of the sensor settings via the message communication completes the
initial setting and the sensor enters detection status. Change the "Basic settings" and
other settings as necessary. The "Basic settings" can be changed in the following pro-
cedure.
Write the data to Attribute ID "03EFH(1007)" of the MU-N/LR-W.
Attribute Data
ID (HEX) type
bit0 : NPN/PNP
0 : NPN
1 : PNP
bit1-2 : Output Mode
0 : 1-Output, 16-Bank
03EFH Indicates the changes of 2byte 1 : 4-Output, 2-Bank
Basic setting changes R/W
(1007) "Basic settings". INT 2 : Binary
bit3-4 : Line 2 Function
0 : Off
1 : Input
2 : Output
(Default value : 0)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
Excute the operation commands for the following address of MU-N/LR-W. (Service
code: 4BH, instance ID: 01H to 10H (sensor ID number))
Attribute
Name Description
ID
(770) request
To check the input/output function being set, read the data from Attribute
Reference
ID: 0335h "Basic settings".
This completes the "basic settings". Refer to the following indices to perform
3
communication.
Communication
 : Default value
Attribute
Data
ID Name Description Attribute Value
type
(HEX)
0320H 2byte
Group 1 Entry count entries that can be set in R 31
(800) UNIT
Group 1.
bit1 : Head Error
Indicates error bit2 : EEPROM Error
information. When an bit3 : Reserved
0321H 2byte
Error Information error occurs, the R bit4 : Reserved
(801) WORD
corresponding bit is bit5 : Reserved
turned ON. bit6 : Sensor/Controller
Unsynchronized
0322H
Reserved - - - -
(802)
0323H
Reserved - - - -
(803)
status of the sensor. bit0 : Output 1
0324H 2byte
Output When the output is ON, R :
(804) WORD
the corresponding bit is bit14: Output 15
turned ON.
value. Current value is
Matching rate when
0325H detection mode is Auto or 2byte
Current Value R 0 to 999
(805) C or C+I mode, received INT
light intensity when
detection mode is I
mode.
0326H Indicates the rate of red 2byte
Light intensity ratio Red R 0 to 9999
(806) received light. INT
0327H Light intensity ratio Indicates the rate of 2byte
R 0 to 9999
(807) Green green received light. INT
0328H Light intensity ratio Indicates the rate of blue 2byte
R 0 to 9999
(808) Blue received light. INT
0329H Indicates the peak value 2byte
Peak-Hold Value R 0 to 999
(809) of the current values. INT

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
 : Default value
Attribute
Data
type
(HEX)
032AH 2byte
Bottom-Hold Value value of the current R 0 to 999
(810) INT
values.
032BH
(811)-
Reserved - - - -
0334H
(820)
bit0 : NPN/PNP
0 : NPN
3 1 : PNP
0335H Indicates the basic 2byte 1 : 4-Output, 2-Bank
Basic setting R
(821) settings of the sensor. INT 2 : Binary
Communication
bit3-4 : Wire 2 Function

0 : Off
1 : Input
2 : Output
(Default value : 0)
0336H
(822)-
Reserved - - - -
0338H
(824)
0 : IDLE
0339H Indicates status of 2byte
(825) Initialization request. INT
2 : FINISH
0 : IDLE
Indicates status of Master
033AH Master Addition 2byte 1 : EXE
Addition Calibration R
(826) Calibration status INT 2 : SUCCESS
request.
3 : FAILURE
0 : IDLE
033BH Master Calibration Indicate status of Master 2byte 1 : EXE
R
(827) status Calibration request. INT 2 : SUCCESS
3 : FAILURE
033CH
(828)-
Reserved - - - -
033EH(
830)
033FH Indicates the Light 2byte
Light intensity stability R/W 0 to 4
(831) intensity stability. INT
0340H 2byte
(832) UINT
Group 2.

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
 : Default value
Attribute
Data
type
(HEX)
0341H
Setting Value 1
(833)
0342H
Setting Value 2
(834)
0343H Indicates the setting
Setting Value 3
(835) value of each outputs.
0344H
Setting Value 4
(836) 1-Output 16-bank
0345H Seting Value 1 : Bank 1
(837)
0346H
Setting Value 5
Setting Value 6
setting value
:
Setting value 16 : Bank
3
(838) 16 Setting value
Communication
0347H
Setting Value 7
(839) 4-Output 2-bank
0348H Setting value 1 : Bank 1,
Setting Value 8 Output 1 Setting value
(840) 2byte 0 to 999 (Default value :
Setting value 2 : Bank 1, R/W
0349H INT 999)
(841) :
034AH Setting value 7 : Bank 2,
Setting Value 10
(842) Output 3 Setting value
034BH Setting value 8 : Bank 2,
(843)
034CH Binary Output
Setting Value 12
(844) Setting value 1 : Output 1
034DH Setting value
Setting Value 13
(845) :
034EH Setting value 15 : Output
Setting Value 14 15 Setting value
(846)
034FH
Setting Value 15
(847)
0350H
Setting Value 16
(848)
Indicates the fixed setting
0351H Master Calibration 2byte 0 to 999 (Default value :
value for Master R/W
(849) setting value INT 950)
calibration.
Difference Monitoring
0352H value when SPOT/MODE 2byte 0 to 999 (Default value :
setting valule R/W
(850) selection is "Difference INT 100)
(Only LR-W70)
Monitoring".
0353H
(851)-
Reserved - - - -
035FH
(863)
0360H 2byte
(864) UINT
Group 3.
0 : Unlock 
Key Lock Status R/W

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
 : Default value
Attribute
Data
type
(HEX)
bit0 : Output1
Indicates the output bit1 : Output2
0363H logic(NO/NC). The 2byte :
NO/NC R/W
(867) corresponding bit turns WORD bit14 : Output15
ON in NC. bit15 : Output16
(Defaule value : 0)
0364H
Reserved - - - -
(868)
0365H Indicates the Response 2byte
Response Time R/W *1
3 (869)
0366H NO/NC(Error output,

Time.
logic(NO/NC) of Error
INT
2byte 0 : NO 
R/W
(870) Stability output) output and Stability INT 1 : NC
Communication
output.
0367H
Reserved - - - -
(871)
0 : Bank1 
0368H Indicates the selected 2byte 1 : Bank2
(872) Bank selection*2 bank number. INT
R/W
:
15 : Bank16
0369H
(873)-
Reserved - - - -
036BH
(875)
0 : 1-Spot Mode 
036CH Spot/Mode Selection Indicates the Spot/Mode 2byte
R/W 1 : Difference Monitoring
(876) (Only LR-W70) selection. INT
2 : 2-Point Matching
Indicate the selected
036DH Interference Reduction frequency mode, in 2byte 0 : Mode A 
R/W
(877) Function mutual interference INT 1 : Mode B
reduction function.
036EH Indicates the selected 2byte
Cannel Selection R/W 0 to 14 (Default vaule : 0)
(878) output channel. INT
0 : Auto 
1 : C+I
036FH Indicates the detection 2byte
Detection Mode (ALL) R/W 2:C
(879) mode of all the outputs. INT
3:I
4 : Setting individually

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
 : Default value
Attribute
Data
type
(HEX)
0370H
Detection Mode 1
(880)
0371H
Detection Mode 2
(881) Indicates the detection
0372H mode of each outputs
Detection Mode 3 when the "Detection
(882)
Mode (ALL)" is Setting
0373H
Detection Mode 4 individually.
(883)
0374H 1-Output 16-bank
(884)
0375H
Detection Mode 5
Detection Mode 6
Detection Mode 1 : Bank
1 mode
3
(885) :
Detection Mode 16 :
Communication
0376H
Detection Mode 7 Bank 16 mode
(886)
0377H 4-Output 2-bank 0 : Auto 
Detection Mode 8
(887) Detection Mode 1 : Bank 2byte 1 : C+I
R/W
0378H 1, Output 1 mode INT 2:C
Detection Mode 9 Detection Mode 2 : Bank 3:I
(888)
1, Output 2 mode
0379H
Detection Mode 10 :
(889)
Detection Mode 7 : Bank
037AH 2, Output 3 mode
Detection Mode 11
(890) Detection Mode 8 : Bank
037BH 2, Output 4 mode
Detection Mode 12
(891)
Binary Output
037CH
Detection Mode 13 Detection Mode 1 :
(892)
Output 1 mode
037DH :
Detection Mode 14
(893) Detection Mode 15 :
037EH Output 15 mode
Detection Mode 15
(894)
037FH
Detection Mode 16
(895)
0380H 2byte
(896) UINT
Group 4.
0381H
(897)-
Reserved - - - -
0386H
(902)
0 : Off 
External Input Function R/W 1 : Calibration input
2 : LED Off
0388H
(904)-
Reserved - - - -
038EH
(910)
0 : Off 
038FH Indicates the function of 2byte
Output2 Function R/W 1 : Error output
(911) Output2. INT
2 : Stability output

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
 : Default value
Attribute
Data
type
(HEX)
0390H
Timer Mode 1
(912)
0391H
Timer Mode 2
(913)
0392H
Timer Mode 3
(914)
0393H
Timer Mode 4
(915)
0394H Indicates the timer mode
3 (916)
0395H
Timer Mode 5
Timer Mode 6
of each outputs.
1-Output 16-bank
(917) Timer Mode 1 : Bank 1
Communication
0396H mode
Timer Mode 7
(918) :
0397H Timer Mode 16 : Bank 16
Timer Mode 8 0 : Off 
(919) mode
2byte 1 : On delay
R/W
0398H INT 2 : Off delay
Timer Mode 9 4-Output 2-bank
(920) 3 : One-shot
Timer Mode 1 : Bank 1
0399H mode
Timer Mode 10
(921) Timer Mode 2 : Bank 2
039AH mode
Timer Mode 11
(922)
Binary Output
039BH Timer Mode 1 : Output 1
Timer Mode 12
(923) to 15 mode
039CH
Timer Mode 13
(924)
039DH
Timer Mode 14
(925)
039EH
Timer Mode 15
(926)
039FH
Timer Mode 16
(927)
03A0H 2byte
(928) UINT
Group 5.
03A1H
(929)-
Reserved - - - -
03ADH
(941)
03AEH Sensor Indicator Indicates the operation of 2byte 0 : Off 
R/W
(942) Blinking Function the sensor indicator. INT 1 : Flush
03AFH Indicates the setting of 2byte 0 : Off
LED On/Off R/W
(943) LED On/Off. INT 1 : On 

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
 : Default value
Attribute
Data
type
(HEX)
03B0H
Timer Setting 1
(944)
03B1H
Timer Setting 2
(945)
03B2H
Timer Setting 3
(946)
03B3H
Timer Setting 4
(947)
03B4H Indicates the time of
(948)
03B5H
Timer Setting 5
Timer Setting 6
output timer. (Unit : ms)
1-Output 16-bank
3
(949) Timer Setting 1 : Bank 1
Communication
03B6H mode
Timer Setting 7
(950) :
03B7H Timer Setting 16 : Bank
Timer Setting 8 16 mode
(951) 2byte
R/W 1 to 999 (Default value : 10)
03B8H INT
Timer Setting 9 4-Output 2-bank
03B9H mode
Timer Setting 10
03BAH mode
Timer Setting 11
(954)
Binary Output
03BBH Timer Setting 1 : Output 1
Timer Setting 12
(955) to 15 mode
03BCH
Timer Setting 13
(956)
03BDH
Timer Setting 14
(957)
03BEH
Timer Setting 15
(958)
03BFH
Timer Setting 16
(959)
03C0H 2byte
(960) UINT
Group 6.
03C1H
(961)-
Reserved - - - -
03CEH
(974)
03CFH Indicates Graphic mode 2byte 0 : On Trigger
Graphic Mode R/W
(975) setting. INT 1 : On Peak 

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
 : Default value
Attribute
Data
type
(HEX)
03D0H Detection Light Source
(976) 1
(977) 2
(978) 3
(979) 4 Indicates the light source
03D4H Detection Light Source for the detection when
3 (980)
03D5H
5
Detection Light Source
using "Super I Mode".
1-Output 16-bank
(981) 6 Light selection 1 : Bank 1
Communication
03D6H Detection Light Source light

(982) 7 :
03D7H Detection Light Source Light selection 16 : Bank 0 : Auto 
(983) 8 16 light 1 : RGB
2byte
R/W 2:R
03D8H Detection Light Source INT
4-Output 2-bank 3:G
(984) 9 Light selection 1 : Bank 1, 4:B
03D9H Detection Light Source Output 1 light
(985) 10 Light selection 2 : Bank 1,
03DAH Detection Light Source Output 2 light
(986) 11 :
Light selection 7 : Bank 2,
03DBH Detection Light Source Output 3 light
(987) 12 Light selection 8 : Bank 2,
03DCH Detection Light Source Output 4 light
(988) 13
03DDH Detection Light Source
(989) 14
03DEH Detection Light Source
(990) 15
03DFH Detection Light Source
(991) 16
03E0H 2byte
(992) UINT
Group 7.
03E1H
(993)-
Reserved - - - -
03E5H
(997)
0 : 100%
03E6H Indicates screen 2byte
Brightness R/W 1 : OFF
(998) brightness. INT
2 : 30% 
03E7H
(999)-
Reserved - - - -
03EAH
(1002)
03EBH
User Tag0
(1003)
Indicates User Tag.
03ECH 2byte
User Tag1 Available as an area to R/W 0 to FFFFh
(1004) UINT
put optional data.
03EDH
User Tag2
(1005)
03EEH
Reserved - - - -
(1006)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
 : Default value
Attribute
Data
type
(HEX)
bit0 : NPN/PNP
0 : NPN
1 : PNP
03EFH Indicates the changes of 2byte 1 : 4-Output, 2-Bank
Basic setting changes R/W
(1007) "Basic setting". UINT 2 : Binary
bit3-4 : Line 2 Function
0 : Off
1 : Input
2 : Output
(Default value : 0) 3
03F0H
(1008)-
Communication
Reserved - - - -
03FFH
(1023)
0400H 2byte
(1024) UINT
Group8
0401H Indicates number of used 2byte
ID Number Count R 3
(1025) IDs. INT
0402H
Reserved - - - -
(1026)
revision, with the upper
0403H Multi Controller bytes representing the 2byte
R 0 to FFFFh
(1027) Revision major revision and the INT
the minor revision.
0404H 2byte
Product Code Indicates product code. R 2010
(1028) INT
Indicates Sensor
revision, with the upper
(1029) major revision and the INT
the minor revision.
Indicates model
0406H STRIN
Product Name 1,0 designation of the R "LR-W**"
(1030) G
sensor.
0407H
(1031)-
Reserved - - - -
040DH
(1037)
040EH 2byte
(1038) INT
040FH 2byte
(1039) INT
0410H 2byte
(1040) INT
0411H
(1041)-
Reserved - - - -
041FH
(1055)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W
*1 Response time
LR-W500
1-Output 4-Output 2-bank
Value
16-bank Binary Output
0 300 µs 2 ms
1 1.1 ms 3 ms
2 11 ms 11 ms
3 100 ms 100 ms
4 500 ms 500 ms
3 LR-W70
Value 1-Output 16-bank 4-Output 2-bank Binary Output
Difference 2-Point Difference Monitoring
1-Spot Mode 1-Spot Mode
Communication
Monitoring Matching 2-Point Matching

0 300 µs 600 µs 500 µs 2 ms 2 ms
1 1.1 ms 2.6 ms 2.1 ms 3 ms 4 ms
2 11 ms 21 ms 21 ms 11 ms 21 ms
3 100 ms 200 ms 200 ms 100 ms 200 ms
4 500 ms 1s 1s 500 ms 1s
LR-WF10
1-Output 4-Output 2-bank
Value
16-bank Binary Output
0 350 µs 3 ms
1 1.2 ms 4 ms
2 13 ms 14 ms
3 120 ms 120 ms
4 600 ms 600 ms
*2 During key lock, switching between banks via data communication is not possible.
To switch between banks via data communication, cancel the key lock (attribute
ID: 865) beforehand.

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/LR-W

Initialization
0301H (769) Initializes all settings, except for "Basic setting".
request
Basic setting set Changes the "Basic setting" in accordance
0302H (770)
request with "Basic setting changes"
0303H (771)
1-point Calibra-
tion start
Starts 1-point calibration. 3
1-point Calibra-
Communication
0304H (772) Ends 1-point calibration.
tion end
2-point Calibra- Starts calibration: the 1st point of 2-point cali-
0305H (773)
tion (1st) bration.
2-point Calibra- Starts calibration: the 2nd point of 2-point cali-
0306H (774)
tion (2nd) bration.
Full Auto Calibra-
0308H (776) Starts Full auto calibration.
tion Start
Full Auto Calibra-
0309H (777) Ends Full auto calibration.
tion End
Adjust Light Inten-
030EH (782) Executes Adjust light Intensity.
sity
Maximum Sensi-
0316H (790) tivity Calibration Starts Maximum sensitivity calibration.
Start
Maximum Sensi-
0317H (791) tivity Calibration Ends Maximum sensitivity calibration.
End
Fiber Status Init-
0319H(793) ilization Initialize the fiber unit status.
(only LR-WF10)
2-Point Matching
031BH (795) Calibration Executes 2-Point Matching Calibration.
(Only LR-W70)
Master Addition
031CH (796) Starts Master addition calibration.
Calibration Start
Master Addition
031DH (797) Ends Master addition calibration.
Calibration End
Master Calibra-
031EH (798) Starts Master calibration.
tion Start
Master Calibra-
031FH (799) Ends Master calibration.
tion End

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/FD-Q
MU-N/FD-Q Series Index (Instance ID: 1 to 16)
When the MU-N/FD-Q is used for the first time after the purchase, the initial setting
should be completed in either of the following methods:
3 Point When the settings of the MU-N and FD-Q are different (such as when
only the FD-Q is replaced), the settings must be synchronized with
Communication
the button operation of the MU-N. For details, refer to "MU-N Series
User's Manual (Using FD-Q)".

Rewriting one of the sensor settings via the mail box communication completes the
initial setting and the sensor enters detection status. Change the "Basic settings" and
other settings as necessary. The "Basic settings" can be changed in the following pro-
cedure.
Write the data to the following address of the MU-N/FD-Q.

Attribute Data
ID type
bit0 : NPN/PNP
0 : NPN
1 : PNP
bit1-2 : I/O functions
0 : 1 Output
Basic setting changes R/W 1 : 2 Output
(1007) "Basic settings". INT
2 : Output + Input
bit3 : Flow unit
0 : Liter
1 : Gallon
(Default value : 0)
Write "1" to the following address of the MU-N/FD-Q.

Attribute
Name Description
ID

(770) request

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/FD-Q
Reference
To check the input/output function being set, read the data from Index 53
"Basic settings".
This completes the "basic settings". Refer to starting on the next page to perform
communication.
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type

0320H 2byte
(800) UNIT
Group1.
3
bit1 : Head Error
bit2 : EEPROM Error
Communication
Indicates error informa- bit3 : Reserved
0321H tion. When an error 2byte bit4 : Counter Flow Error
Error Information R
(801) occurs, the correspond- WORD bit5 : Cannot receive detec-
ing bit is turned ON. tion signal
bit6 : Sensor/Contoller
Unsynchronized
0322H
(802) to
Reserved - - - -
0323H
(803)
0324H 2byte bit0 : Output 1
(804) WORD bit1 : Output 2
ON.
0325H Indicates the instanta- 2byte
Instantaneous flow R 0 to 9999
(805) neous flow value. INT
0326H
(806) to
Reserved - - - -
0327H
(807)
0328H Indicates the integrated 2byte
Integrated flow R 0 to 9999
(808) flow value. INT
0329H Indicates the peak value 2byte
Peak-Hold Value R 0 to 9999
(809) of the current values. INT
032AH 2byte
Bottom-Hold Value value of the current val- R 0 to 9999
(810) INT
ues.
032BH
(811) to
Reserved - - - -
032DH
(813)
When using "Origin
Adjustment" or "Condi-
032EH 2byte bit0 : Origin Adjustment
Customize Status tion Monitoring", the cor- R
(814) WORD bit1 : Condition Monitoring
ON.

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/FD-Q
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
032FH
(815) to
Reserved - - - -
0334H
(820)
bit0 : NPN/PNP
0 : NPN
1 : PNP
0 : 1 Output
0335H Indicates the basic set- 2byte
3 (821)
Basic setting
tings of the sensor. INT
R 1 : 2 Output
2 : Output + Input
bit3 : Flow unit
0 : Liter
1 : Gallon
Communication
(Default value : 0)
0336H
(822) to
Reserved - - - -
0338H
(824)
0 : IDLE
2 : FINISH
0 : IDLE
Indicates the status of
033AH Origin adjustment sta- 2byte 1 : EXE
"Origin Adjustment" R
(826) tus INT 2 : SUCCESS
request.
3 : FAILURE
0 : IDLE
033BH Condition monitoring 2byte 1 : EXE
"Condition Monitoring R
(827) status INT 2 : SUCCESS
function" request.
3 : FAILURE
033CH Indicates the flow display 2byte 0 : 0.01
Flow display resolution R
(828) resolution. INT 1 : 0.1
Indicates the reference
033DH 2byte
Reference flow rate flow in Condition Monitor- R 0 to 9999
(829) INT
ing mode.
033EH Indicates the simulation 2byte 0 : Off
Simulation Mode R
(830) mode setting. INT 1 : On
0 : Direction not possible
1 : Low
033FH Indicates the signal sta- 2byte
Stability level R 2 : Medium-Low
(831) bility level. INT
3 : Medium-High
4 : High
0340H 2byte
Group2 Entry count entries that can be set in R/W 15
(832) UINT
Group2.
0341H Setting Value (Output1 lower limit of the setting 2byte
R/W 0 to 9999
(833) / Output1 Area Lower) value is displayed when INT
Area.

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/FD-Q
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type

0342H Setting Value (Output2 lower limit of the setting 2byte
R/W 0 to 9999
(834) / Output2 Area Lower) value is displayed when INT
Area.
0343H
Reserved - - - -
(835)
0344H
(836)
Setting Value (Output1
Area Upper)
of the setting value of
Output1 when the
2byte
INT
R/W 0 to 9999 3
"Detection Mode" is Area.
Communication
0345H Setting Value (Output2 of the setting value of 2byte
R/W 0 to 9999
(837) Area Upper) Output2 when the INT
"Detection Mode" is Area.
0346H
(838) to
Reserved - - - -
0347H
(839)
0348H value of hysteresis when 2byte
Hysteresis Value R/W 0 to 9999
(840) the "Hysteresis Setting" UINT
is Custom.
0349H
(841) to
Reserved - - - -
034DH
(845)
034EH Integrated flow set 2byte 0 to 9999 (Default vaule :
value in Integrated flow R/W
(846) value INT 150)
mode.
034FH Indicates the Zero cut 2byte
Zero cut flow rate R/W 0 to 9999
(847) flow rate. INT
0350H
(848) to
Reserved - - - -
035FH
(863)
0360H 2byte
(864) UINT
Group3.
0 : Unlock 
Key Lock Status R/W
0363H
Reserved - - - -
(867)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/FD-Q
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
bit0 : Output 1
0 : N.O.
1 : N.C.
0364H logic(NO/NC). The corre- 2byte
N.O./N.C. R/W bit1 : Output 2
0 : N.O.
NC.
1 : N.C.
(Default value : 0)
0 : 0.5s
1 : 1s
3 0365H
(869)
Response Time
Indicates the Response
Time.
2byte
INT
R/W
2 : 2.5s
3 : 5s 
4 : 10s
5 : 30s
6 : 60s
Communication
0366H
(870) to
Reserved - - - -
0369H
(873)
0 : 0.1 (Only Q10C,Q20C)
1:1
2 : 10
036AH Indicates the value of the 2byte
Integrated flow unit R/W 3 : 100
(874) integrated flow unit. INT
4 : 1000
5 : 10000
(Only Q32C,Q50C)
036BH Indicates the selected 2byte 0 : From left to right 
Flow direction R/W
(875) flow direction. INT 1 : From right to left
FD-Q10C
0 : 1/4
1 : 3/8
FD-Q20C
0 : 1/2
1 : 3/4
036CH Selecting bore diame- Indicates the selected 2byte
R/W FD-Q32C
(876) ter of pipe bore diameter of the pipe. INT
0:1
1 : 1 1/4
FD-Q50C
0 : 1 1/2
1 : 2
(Default value : 0)
0 : No correction 
036DH Correcting flow rate Indicates the corrected 2byte
R/W 1 : Selecting pipe schedule
(877) value flow rate value. INT
2 : Flow rate magnification
0 : SGP 
036EH Selecting pipe sched- Indicates the selected 2byte 1 : Sch20
R/W
(878) ule pipe schedule. INT 2 : Sch40
3 : Sch80
036FH Adjusting flow rate value of Setting flow rate 2byte 10 to 250 (Default vaule :
R/W
(879) span magnification (Span). INT 100)
(Unit : ×1/100)
0370H
(880) to
Reserved - - - -
037FH
(895)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/FD-Q
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type

0380H 2byte
(896) UINT
Group4.
0381H
(897) to
Reserved - - - -
0383H
(899)
0 : Instantaneous flow rate
mode 
0384H
(900)
Detection Mode (Out-
put1)
Indicates the detection
mode of Output1.
2byte
INT
R/W 1 : Area mode
2 : Pulse output mode
3
3 : Integrated flow mode
Communication
0385H
(901) to
Reserved - - - -
0386H
(902)
0 : Integrated flow reset
0387H Indicates the settings of 2byte input 
External Input Function R/W
(903) the external input. INT 1 : Flow rate zero input
2 : Origin adjustment input
0388H
(904) to
Reserved - - - -
039FH
(927)
03A0H 2byte
(928) UINT
Group5.
03A1H
(929) to
Reserved - - - -
03A3H
(931)
0 : Instantaneous flow rate
03A4H Detection Mode (Out- Indicates the detection 2byte mode 
R/W
(932) put2) mode of Output2. INT 1 : Area mode
2 : Error output mode
03A5H
(933) to
Reserved - - - -
03ADH
(941)
03AEH Indicates the operation of 2byte 0 : Off 
Sensor Indicator Flash R/W
(942) the sensor indicator. INT 1 : Flush
03AFH Indicates the setting of 2byte 0 : Off 
Flow rate zero input R/W
(943) flow rate zero input. INT 1 : On
03B0H
(944) to
Reserved - - - -
03BFH
(959)
03C0H 2byte
(960) UINT
Group6.

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/FD-Q
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
03C1H
(961) to
Reserved - - - -
03CCH
(972)
0 : 0.01 (Only Q10C)
03CDH Indicates the display res- 2byte
Display resolution R/W 1 : 0.1 
(973) olution setting. INT
2:1
03CEH Indicates the display 2byte
Display averaging R/W 0 to 10 (Default value : 1)
(974) averaging setting. INT
3 03CFH Indicator illumination Indicates the display indi- 2byte
0 : Green - Off 
1 : Off - Red
R/W
(975) mode cator illumination mode. INT 2 : Green - Red
Communication
3 : PMI
03D0H
(976) to
Reserved - - - -
03DFH
(991)
03E0H 2byte
(992) UNIT
Group7.
03E1H
(993) to
Reserved - - - -
03E5H
(997)
0 : 100%
Brightness R/W 1 : Off
(998) ness. INT
2 : 30% 
03E7H
(999) to
Reserved - - - -
03EAH
(1002)
03EBH
User Tag0
(1003)
Indicates User Tag.Avail-
03ECH 2byte
User Tag1 able as an area to put R/W 0 to FFFFh
(1004) INT
optional data.
03EDH
User Tag2
(1005)
03EEH
Reserved - - - -
(1006)
bit0 : NPN/PNP
0 : NPN
1 : PNP
0 : 1 Output
Basic setting changes R/W 1 : 2 Output
(1007) "Basic setting". INT
2 : Output + Input
bit3 : Flow unit
0 : Liter
1 : Gallon
(Default value : 0)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/FD-Q
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
03F0H
(1008)
to Reserved - - - -
03FFH
(1023)
0400H 2byte
(1024) UINT
Group8.
(1025)
0402H
ID Number Count
used IDs. INT
R 3
3
Reserved - - - -
(1026)
Communication
revisions, with the upper
0403H Multi Controller Revi- bytes representing the 2byte
R 0 to FFFFh
(1027) sion major revisions and the INT
0404H Indicates the product 2byte
Product Code R 2011
(1028) code. INT
Indicates Sensor revi-
sions, with the upper
(1029) major revisions and the INT
0406H Indicates the model des- STRIN
Product Name R "FD-Q*C"
(1030) ignation of the sensor. G
0407H
(1031)
to Reserved - - - -
040DH
(1037)
040EH 2byte
Series Code Indicates the series code. R 2011
(1038) INT
040FH Indicates the series ver- 2byte
Series Version R 1
(1039) sion. INT
0410H 2byte
(1040) INT
0411H
(1041)
to Reserved - - - -
041FH
(1055)

3-5 Parameter List
MU-N/FD-Q

Attribute
Name Description
ID
0301H
Initialization request Initializes all settings, except for "Basic setting".
(769)
0302H Basic setting set
Changes the "Basic setting" in accordance with "Basic setting changes"
(770) request
3 030AH Performing origin
Performs origin adjustment.
(778) adjustment
Communication
030BH Canceling origin

Cancels origin adjustment.
(779) adjustment
0310H
Reset Hold Value Resets the hold value.
(784)
031DH Performing condition
Performs condition monitoring.
(797) monitoring
031EH Canceling condition
Cancels condition monitoring.
(798) monitoring
031FH
Reset integrated flow Reset the integrated flow value.
(799)

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
FD-XA2 (Instance ID : 1 to 16)
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type

Group 1 Entry count R 31
(800) entries in Group 1. UINT
bit0: Over current error 3
bit1: Head error
bit2: EEPROM error
Indicates error
Communication
bit3: Reserve
information. When an
0321H 2byte bit4: Counter flow error
Error information error occurs, the R
(801) WORD bit5: Cannot receive
corresponding bit is
detection signal
turned ON.
bit6: Reserve
bit7: Sensor
communication error
Indicates warning
information. When a
0322H 2byte
Warning information warning occurs, the R bit0: Bubble alert
(802) WORD
turned ON.
status of the warning
function. When the
0323H 2byte
Warning function warning function is R bit0: Bubble alert
(803) WORD
operating, the
turned ON.
status of the sensor.
0324H 2byte bit0: Output1
(804) WORD bit1: Output2
turned ON.
Indicates the
instantaneous flow value.
The unit is as follows.
• FD-XS1/XS8, XS20
[high resolution]:
1mL/min or 0.1G/h
0325H (fixed) 2byte
Instantaneous flow rate R 0 to 65535
(805) • FD-XS20 [standard]: UINT
0.01L/min or 0.1G/h
(fixed)
If you want to read values
with even higher
resolution, use attribute
ID 032DH (813).

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
Indicates the shot

amount.
[high resolution]:
0326H 0.01mL (fixed) 2byte
Shot amount R 0 to 65535
(806) • FD-XS20 [standard]: UINT
0.001L (fixed)
If you want to read values
with even higher
3 resolution, use attribute

ID 032EH (814).
0327H
Reserved - - - -
(807)
Communication
0328H Indicates the integrated 2byte

Integrated flow value R 0 to 65535
(808) flow value. UINT
0329H 2byte
Peak-hold flow value of the instantaneous flow R 0 to 65535
(809) UINT
values.
032AH value of the 2byte
Bottom-hold flow value R 0 to 65535
(810) instantaneous flow UINT
values.
032BH Indicates the peak value 2byte
Peak-hold shot amount R 0 to 65535
(811) of the shot amounts. UINT
032CH Bottom-hold shot 2byte
value of the shot R 0 to 65535
(812) amount UINT
amounts.
Indicates the
instantaneous flow value
with the highest
resolution.
Instantaneous flow rate The unit is as follows.
032DH 2byte
• FD-XS1/XS8, XS20 R 0 to 65535
(813) (high resolution)*1 [high resolution]: 0.1mL/
UINT
min or 0.01G/h (fixed)
• FD-XS20 [standard]:
0.01L/min or 0.1G/h
(fixed)
Indicates the shot
amount with the highest
resolution.
Shot amount (high The unit is as follows.
032EH 2byte
• FD-XS1/XS8, XS20 R 0 to 65535
(814) resolution)*1 [high resolution]:
UINT
0.001mL (fixed)
0.001L (fixed)
032FH
(815)
to Reserved - - - -
0330H
(816)

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
When using "Origin

Adjustment" or
0331H 2byte bit0: Origin adjustment
Custom status "Condition Monitoring", R
(817) WORD bit1: Condition monitoring
turned ON.
0332H
(818)
to Reserved - - - -
0337H
(823)
0338H
Init settings finished
Indicates if the initials 2byte
R
0: Unfinished
3
(824) settings are finished. INT 1: Finished
Communication
0: Idle
0339H Indicates status of 2byte
Initialization status R 1: Exe
(825) Initialization request. INT
2: Finish
0: Idle
033AH Origin adjustment 2byte 1: Exe
(826) status INT 2: Finish
request.
3: Failure
0: Idle
033BH Condition monitoring 2byte 1: Exe
"Condition Monitoring R
(827) status INT 2: Finish
function" request.
3: Failure
Indicates the resolution of
the parameters related to
the instantaneous flow
value when they are
read/written with
Resolution message communication.
0: 0.01
033CH (instantaneous flow) The unit is as follows. 2byte
R 1: 0.1
(828) when message • FD-XS1/XS8, XS20 INT
2: 1
communication is used [high resolution]: 2:
1mL/min or 1: 0.1G/h
(fixed)
• FD-XS20 [standard]: 0:
0.01L/min or 1: 0.1G/h
(fixed)
033DH 2byte
Reference flow rate flow in Condition R 0 to 65535
(829) UINT
Monitoring mode.
Indicates the resolution of
the parameters related to
the shot amount when
they are read/written with
Resolution (shot
message communication.
033EH amount) when 2byte 0: 0.001
The unit is as follows. R
(830) message INT 1: 0.01
communication is used
[high resolution]: 1:
0.01mL (fixed)
0: 0.001L (fixed)

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0: Detection not possible

1: Low
033FH Indicates the signal 2byte 2: Medium-low
Stability level R
(831) stability level. INT 3: Medium-high
4: High
5: Searching Signal
3 value of Output1. The
lower limit of the setting
value is displayed when
0341H Flow threshold (Output the "Detection Mode" is 2byte
Communication
R/W 0 to 65535
(833) 1/Area Lo) set to Area. UINT
Default value is 100 (XS1)/
800 (XS8, XS20 [high
resolution])/200 (XS20
[standard]).
Output1 when the
"Detection Mode" is set
0342H Shot threshold (Output 2byte
to Shot. R/W 0 to 65535
(834) 1/Area Lo) UINT
[standard]).
0343H
Reserved - - - -
(835)
Output1 when the
0344H Flow threshold (Output 2byte
to Area. R/W 0 to 65535
(836) 1/Area Hi) UINT
3200 (XS8, XS20 [high
[standard]).
Output1 when the
0345H Shot threshold (Output 2byte
(837) 1/Area Hi) UINT
1800 (XS8, XS20 [high
[standard]).
0346H
Reserved - - - -
(838)
0347H
Reserved - - - -
(839)

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type

value of hysteresis.
0348H Default value is 10 (XS1)/ 2byte
Hysteresis R/W 0 to 65535
(840) 20 (XS8, XS20 [high UINT
[standard]).
value of Output2 of
instantaneous flow
0349H Flow threshold (Output

values. The lower limit of
the setting value is
displayed when the 2byte
3
R/W 0 to 65535
(841) 2/Area Lo) "Detection Mode" is set UINT
to Area.
Communication
1600 (XS8, XS20 [high
[standard]).
Output2 when the
034AH Flow threshold (Output 2byte
to Area. R/W 0 to 65535
(842) 2 Area Hi) UINT
2400 (XS8, XS20 [high
[standard]).
Output2 when the
034BH Shot threshold (Output 2byte
(843) 2 /Area Lo) UINT
[standard]).
Output2 when the
034CH Shot threshold (Output 2byte
(844) 2 Area Hi) UINT
1200 (XS8, XS20 [high
[standard]).
034DH
Reserved - - - -
(845)
value in Integrated flow
mode.
034EH Integrated flow 2byte
Default value is 200 (XS1)/ R/W 0 to 9999
(846) threshold value UINT
[standard]).

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
Indicates the Zero cut

flow rate.
034FH Default value is 20 (XS1)/ 2byte
Zero-cut flow rate R/W 0 to 65535
(847) 40 (XS8, XS20 [high UINT
[standard]).
0350H
(848)
to Reserved - - - -
3 035FH
(863)
Communication
0: Unlock
0361H Indicates the status of the 2byte 1: Key lock
Key Lock Status R/W
(865) Key lock. INT 2: Password lock
3: Communication lock
Password R/W 0 to 9999 (Default value :0)
(866) for Key lock. UINT
0363H
Reserved - - - -
(867)
Indicates the output logic
bit0: Output 1
0364H (NO/NC). The 2byte
N.O./N.C. R/W bit1: Output 2
(868) corresponding bit turns WORD
(Default value :0)
ON in NC.
0: 50ms
1: 100ms
2: 500ms 
3: 1s
Response time R/W 4: 2.5s
(869) Time. INT
5: 5s
6: 10s
7: 30s
8: 60s
0366H
Reserved - - - -
(870)
0367H Indicates the Tuning 2byte
Tuning percentage R/W 1 to 99 (Default value: 25)
(871) percentage. UINT
0368H Indicates the output 2byte 0: Output1 
Out1/Out2 Switch R/W
(872) during tuning. INT 1: Output2
0369H
Reserved - - - -
(873)
0: 0.01
Indicates the value of the
1: 0.1
integrated flow unit.
2: 1
036AH Default value is 2 (XS1)/ 2byte
Integrated flow unit R/W 3: 10
(874) 2 (XS8, XS20 [high INT
4: 100
5: 1000
[standard]).
6: 10000
036BH Indicates the selected 2byte 0: From Cable to LED 
Flow direction selection R/W
(875) flow direction. INT 1: From LED to Cable

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0: [XS1/8/20]4mm, 6mm,
10mm 
1: [XS1/8/20]1/8inch, 8mm,
12mm
036CH Pipe bore diameter Indicates the selected 2byte
R/W 2: [XS1/8/20]3mm, 1/4inch,
(876) selection bore diameter of the pipe. INT
3/8inch
3: [XS20]1/2inch
4: [XS20]6A
5: [XS20]8A
0: No correction 
036DH
(877)
Flow rate tuning
Indicates the corrected
flow rate value.
2byte
INT
R/W 1: Pro settings
2: Span adjustment
3
036EH
Communication
Reserved - - - -
(878)
036FH Flow rate span value of Setting flow rate 2byte 100 to 10000 (Default
R/W
(879) adjustment*2 magnification (Span). UINT value: 1000)
(Unit : *1/1000)
0370H
(880)
to Reserved - - - -
037FH
(895)
0381H
(897)
to Reserved - - - -
0383H
(899)
0: Instantaneous flow rate
mode 
0384H Output 1 detection Indicates the detection 2byte 1: Area mode
R/W
(900) mode mode of Output 1. INT 2: Pulse output (+) mode
3: Integrated flow mode
4: Shot mode
0385H
Reserved - - - -
(901)
0386H
Reserved - - - -
(902)
0: Off 
0387H Input 1 function Indicates the settings of 2byte
R/W 1: Flow rate zero input
(903) selection the external input 1. INT
2: Shot sampling trigger
0: Off 
0388H Input 2 function Indicates the settings of 2byte 1: Integrated flow reset
R/W
(904) selection the external input 2. INT input
2: Zero shift input
0389H
Reserved - - - -
(905)
038AH
Reserved - - - -
(906)

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
Set the pipe outer

diameter to an
Pipe outer diameter appropriate value.
038BH 2byte
Default value is R/W 270 to 1430
(907) input*3 400(XS1)/600(XS8)/
UINT
1000(XS20).
(Unit: x 1/100 mm)
Selecting the pipe
thickness correctly will
038CH 2byte 10 to 400 (Default value:
3 (908) Pipe thickness input*3 improve flow rate
readings.
(Unit: x 1/100 mm)
UINT
R/W
100)
If the fluid is not water,

Communication
and if the fluid's sound

038DH speed and kinetic 2byte 0: Water 
(909) Liquid type selection*3 viscosity is known, INT
R/W
1: Value input
accuracy will increase by
inputing the proper value.
038EH Ultrasonic speed Inputs the sound speed 2byte 300 to 1900 (Default value:
R/W
(910) input*3 of the fluid. (Unit: m/s) UINT 1497)
Kinematic viscosity Inputs the kinetic

038FH 2byte 1 to 65535 (Default value:
viscosity of the fluid. R/W
(911) input*3 (Unit: x 1/100 cSt)
UINT 100)
0390H
(912)
to Reserved - - - -
039FH
(927)
03A0H Indicates the number of 2byte
03A1H
(929)
to Reserved - - - -
03A3H
(931)
0: Instantaneous flow rate
mode 
1: Area mode
03A4H Output 2 detection Indicates the detection 2byte 2: Pulse output(-) mode
R/W
(932) mode mode of Output 2. INT 3: Shot mode
4: Error output mode
5: Bubble alert mode
6: Error and alert mode
03A5H
Reserved - - - -
(933)
0: Default 
03A6H Indicates Bubble cancel 2byte
Bubble cancel custom R/W 1: Custom
(934) setting. INT
2: Off
0: Low
Bubble cancel level R/W 1: Mid 
(935) level. INT
2: High
Indicates Hold time of the
03A8H 2byte
Hold time bubble cancel setting. R/W 1 to 60 (Default value: 5)
(936) UINT
(Unit: Second)

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
03A9H Indicates Bubble alert 2byte 0: Default 

Bubble alert custom R/W
(937) setting. INT 1: Custom
0: Low
03AAH Indicates Bubble alert 2byte
Bubble alert level R/W 1: Mid 
(938) level. INT
2: High
03ABH Indicates Alert one shot 2byte
Alert one shot timer R/W 1 to 100 (Default value: 10)
(939) timer. (Unit: x 1/10 s) UINT
Indicates if the Integrated
03ACH 2byte 0: Off 
(940)
Total decrement flow value decreases
when the flow reverses.
INT
R/W
1: On 3
Indicates if the shot
03ADH 2byte 0: Off 
Shot decrement amount decreases when R/W
Communication
(941) INT 1: On
the flow reverses.
Indicates the operation of
03AEH 2byte 0: Off 
Blink head LED the head indicator when R/W
(942) INT 1: On
setting the controller.
03AFH Indicates the setting of 2byte 0: Off 
(943) flow rate zero input. INT 1: On
03B0H Indicates the simulation 2byte 0: Off 
Simulation mode R/W
(944) mode setting. INT 1: On
Indicates the
03B1H 2byte
Simulation flow rate instantaneous flow value R/W 0 to 65535
(945) UINT
in simulation mode.
Indicates the shot
03B2H 2byte
Simulation shot amount amount of simulation R/W 0 to 65535
(946) UINT
mode.
03B3H
(947)
to Reserved - - - -
03BFH
(959)
03C0H Indicates the number of 2byte
03C1H
(961)
to Reserved - - - -
03C5H
(965)
03C6H 2byte 0: Normal 
Current Display Indicates current display. R/W
(966) INT 1: Sub
03C7H
(967)
to Reserved - - - -
03CBH
(971)
Indicates the display
resolution (shot amount)
0: 0.001
Main unit display of the FD-X main unit.
03CCH 2byte 1: 0.01
resolution (shot Default value is 1 (XS1)/ R/W
(972) INT 2: 0.1
amount) 1 (XS8, XS20 [high
3: 1
[standard]).

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type

resolution (instantaneous
0: 0.001
flow) of the FD-X main
Main unit display 1: 0.01
03CDH unit. 2byte
resolution R/W 2: 0.1
(973) Default value is 3 (XS1)/ INT
(instantaneous flow) 3: 1
3 (XS8, XS20 [high
4: 10
[standard]).
Display averaging R/W 0 to 100 (Default value: 10)
3 (974) averaging setting. UINT
0: Green - Off 
1: Off - Red
03CFH Head indicator 2byte 2: Green - Red
indicator illumination R/W
Communication
(975) illumination mode INT 3: PMI (Predictive Maint

mode.
Info)
4: Off
03D0H
(976)
to Reserved - - - -
03DFH
(991)
03E0H Indicates the number of 2byte
function. When the bit is
03E1H ON, the corresponding 2byte
Warning Disable R/W bit0: Bubble alert
(993) warning does not occur. WORD
By default, bit 0 is ON. To
enable the Bubble alert
warning, turn OFF bit 0.
03E2H Indicates the TAG 8 characters or less
(994) character string. (Default : "")
03E3H
(995)
to Reserved - - - -
03E5H
(997)
0: 100%
03E6H Indicates screen 2byte
Screen brightness R/W 1: Off
(998) brightness. INT
2: 30% 

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
Indicates the resolution

for the instanteneous flow
values while using cyclic
communication.
If the parameter changes
from 0 to 1, resolution for
the instanteneous flow
value while cyclic
03E7H Resolution for Cyclic communication changes 2byte 0: Standard 
as follows. R/W
(999) Com (Flow) INT 1: High Resolution
[high resolution]:
1mL/min to 0.1mL/min
3
or 0.1G/h to 0.01G/h*4
Communication
0.01L/min to
0.001L/min or 0.1G/h to
0.01G/h
for the shot amount
values while using cyclic
communication.
If the parameter changes
from 0 to 1, resolution for
the shot amount while
03E8H Resolution for Cyclic 2byte 0: Standard 
cyclic communication R/W
(1000) Com (Shot) INT 1: High Resolution
changes as follows.
[high resolution]:
0.01mL to 0.001mL
0.001L to 0.001L (No
change)
03E9H
(1001)
to Reserved - - - -
03EBH
(1003)
03ECH 0: Liter 
Flow unit Indicates the flow unit. - -
(1004) 1: Gallon
03EDH
Reserved - - - -
(1005)
03EEH Indicates the pipe 2byte 0: Metal 
Pipe material selection R/W
(1006) material selected. INT 1: Plastic
03EFH Indicates the output type 2byte 0: NPN 
NPN/PNP selection R/W
(1007) (NPN/PNP) selected. INT 1: PNP
03F0H
(1008)
to Reserved - - - -
03FFH
(1023)
ID Number Count R 2
(1025) IDs. INT

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0: No head
0402H Indicates connected 2byte 1: FD-XS1
Head Type R
(1026) head type. INT 2: FD-XS8
3: FD-XS20
0403H
Reserved - - - -
(1027)
0404H 2byte
(1028) INT
3 0405H
the upper bytes
representing the major 2byte
Revision R 259
(1029) revisionand the lower INT
Communication

minor revision.
Indicates model
0406H
Product Name designation of the STRING R "FD-XA2"
(1030)
sensor.
0407H
(1031)
to Reserved - - - -
040DH
(1037)
040EH 2byte
(1038) INT
040FH 2byte
(1039) INT
0410H 2byte
(1040) INT
0411H
(1041)
to Reserved - - - -
041FH
(1055)
*1 This is only supported by FD-XA2 units whose serial numbers start with the letter
"G."
*2 To enable correction based on parameters, you need to select [2: Span adjust-
ment] at Attribute ID 036DH (877).
*3 To enable correction based on parameters, you need to select [1: Pro settings] at
Attribute ID 036DH (877).
*4 When the FD-XS8 is used in combination with the FD-XC8R3 (resin clamp set),
the rated flow range is 0 to 8000 mL/min. If, however, high resolution is selected,
the range of the instantaneous flow value will be "0.0 to 6553.5 mL/min."

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2


0301H(769) Initialization request Executes initialization.
With the FD-XS20 sensor head
Initialization request (dedicated
connected, the resolution is set to
0302H(770) for FD-XS20 high-resolution
high resolution (High (mL)) and all
mode)*2
other parameters are initialized.*3 3
0308H(776) Full auto calibration : Start*2 Starts fully automatic calibration.
Communication
0309H(777) Full auto calibration : Finish*2 Ends fully automatic calibration.
030AH(778) Perform origin adjustment Executes origin adjustment.
030BH(779) Cancel origin adjustment Cancels origin adjustment.
0310H(784) Reset hold values Resets the hold value.
031BH(795) Multi shot calibration : Start*2 Starts multi shot calibration.
031CH(796) *2 Ends multi shot calibration.
Multi shot calibration : Finish
031DH(797) Perform conditional monitoring Executes conditional monitoring.
031EH(798) Cancel conditional monitoring Cancels conditional monitoring.
031FH(799) Reset integrated flow value Resets integrated flow value.
*1 Before starting tuning, select the output used for the tuning at Attribute ID 0368H
(872).
*2 This is only supported by FD-XA2 units whose serial numbers start with the letter
"G."
*3 This operates the same as the normal initialization request for the FD-XS1/XS8
sensor head.

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2E
FD-XA2E (Instance ID : 1 to 16)
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type

3 bit0: Over current error
bit1: Head error
bit2: EEPROM error
Communication
Indicates error informa- bit3: Reserve

0321H tion. When an error 2byte bit4: Counter flow error
Error information R
(801) occurs, the correspond- WORD bit5: Cannot receive detec-
ing bit is turned ON. tion signal
bit6: Reserve
bit7: Sensor communica-
tion error
0322H
Reserved - - - -
(802)
0323H
Reserved - - - -
(803)
0324H 2byte bit0: Output1
(804) WORD bit1: Output2
ON.
Indicates the instanta-
neous flow value.
0325H 2byte
Instantaneous flow rate • FD-XS1/XS8: 1mL/min R 0 to 65535
(805) UINT
or 0.1G/h (fixed)
• FD-XS20: 0.01L/min or
0.1G/h (fixed)
0326H
(806)
to Reserved - - - -
0330H
(816)
When using "Origin
Adjustment" or "Condi-
0331H 2byte bit0: Origin adjustment
Custom status tion Monitoring", the cor- R
(817) WORD bit1: Condition monitoring
ON.
0332H
(818)
to Reserved - - - -
0337H
(823)
0338H Indicates if the initials 2byte 0: Unfinished
Init settings finished R
(824) settings are finished. INT 1: Finished

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2E
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0: Idle
Initialization status R 1: Exe
2: Finish
0: Idle
033AH Origin adjustment sta- 2byte 1: Exe
(826) tus INT 2: Finish
request.
3: Failure
0: Idle
033BH Condition monitoring 2byte 1: Exe
(827) status
"Condition Monitoring
function" request.
INT
R
2: Finish
3: Failure
3
Communication
for the instantaneous flow
value when it is read with
Resolution (instanta- message communication.
0: 0.01
033CH neous flow) when mes- The unit is as follows. 2byte
R 1: 0.1
(828) sage communication is • FD-XS1/XS8: INT
2: 1
used 2: 1mL/min or 1: 0.1G/h
(fixed)
• FD-XS20: 0: 0.01L/min
or 1: 0.1G/h (fixed)
033DH 2byte
Reference flow rate flow in Condition Monitor- R 0 to 65535
(829) UINT
ing mode.
033EH
Reserved - - - -
(830)
0: Detection not possible
1: Low
033FH Indicates the signal sta- 2byte 2: Medium-low
Stability level R
(831) bility level. INT 3: Medium-high
4: High
5: Searching Signal
value of Output1.
0341H Flow threshold (Output 2byte
Default value is 100 R/W 0 to 65535
(833) 1) UINT
(XS1E) /800 (XS8E) /200
(XS20E).
0342H
(834)
to Reserved - - - -
0347H
(839)
0348H value of hysteresis. 2byte
Hysteresis R/W 0 to 65535
(840) Default value is 25 (XS1E) / UINT
25 (XS8E) /10 (XS20E).
0349H
(841)
to Reserved - - - -
034EH
(846)

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2E
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
Indicates the Zero cut

034FH flow rate. 2byte
Zero-cut flow rate R/W 0 to 65535
(847) Default value is 50 (XS1E) / UINT
50 (XS8E) /15 (XS20E).
0350H
(848)
to Reserved - - - -
035FH
(863)
3 0360H
(864)
Group 3 Entry count
entries in Group 3.
2byte
UINT
R 15
0: Unlock
Communication
0361H Indicates the status of the 2byte 1: Key lock

Key Lock Status R/W
(865) Key lock. INT 2: Password lock
3: Communication lock
Password R/W 0 to 9999 (Default value :0)
(866) for Key lock. UINT
0363H
Reserved - - - -
(867)
bit0: Output 1
0364H (NO/NC). The corre- 2byte
N.O./N.C. R/W bit1: Output 2
(Default value :0)
NC.
0: 50ms
Response time R/W 1: 100ms
(869) Time. INT
2: 500ms 
0366H
(870)
to Reserved - - - -
036AH
(874)
036BH Indicates the selected 2byte 0: From Cable to LED 
Flow direction selection R/W
(875) flow direction. INT 1: From LED to Cable
0: [XS1/8/20]4mm, 6mm,
10mm 
1: [XS1/8/20]1/8inch, 8mm,
12mm
036CH Pipe bore diameter Indicates the selected 2byte
R/W 2: [XS1/8/20]3mm,
(876) selection bore diameter of the pipe. INT
1/4inch, 3/8inch
3: [XS20]1/2inch
4: [XS20]6A
5: [XS20]8A
036DH
Reserved - - - -
(877)
036EH
Reserved - - - -
(878)
036FH Flow rate span adjust- value of Setting flow rate 2byte 100 to 10000 (Default
R/W
(879) ment magnification (Span). UINT value: 1000)
(Unit : *1/1000)

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2E
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0370H
(880)
to Reserved - - - -
037FH
(895)
0381H
(897)
to
0386H
Reserved - - - -
3
(902)
Communication
0: Off 
Input function selection R/W 1: Flow rate zero input
2: Zero shift input
0388H
(904)
to Reserved - - - -
039FH
(927)
03A1H
(929)
to Reserved - - - -
03A5H
(933)
0: Default 
Bubble cancel custom R/W 1: Custom
(934) setting. INT
2: Off
0: Low
Bubble cancel level R/W 1: Mid 
(935) level. INT
2: High
Indicates Hold time of the
03A8H 2byte
Hold time bubble cancel setting. R/W 1 to 60 (Default value: 5)
(936) UINT
(Unit: Second)
03A9H
(937)
to Reserved - - - -
03ADH
(941)
Indicates the operation of
03AEH 2byte 0: Off 
Blink head LED the head indicator when R/W
(942) INT 1: On
setting the controller.
03AFH Indicates the setting of 2byte 0: Off 
(943) flow rate zero input. INT 1: On
03B0H 2byte 0: Off 
Simulation mode neous flow value in simu- R/W
(944) INT 1: On
lation mode.
03B1H 2byte
Simulation flow rate neous flow values of sim- R/W 0 to 65535
(945) UINT
ulation mode.

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2E
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
03B2H
(946)
to Reserved - - - -
03BFH
(959)
03C1H
(961)
3 to
03C5H
Reserved - - - -
(965)
Communication
03C6H 2byte 0: Normal 

Current Display Indicates current display. R/W
(966) INT 1: Sub
03C7H
(967)
to Reserved - - - -
03CCH
(972)
Indicates the display res-
olution (instantaneous 1: 0.01
Main unit display reso-
03CDH flow) of the FD-X main 2byte 2: 0.1
lution (instantaneous R/W
(973) unit. INT 3: 1
flow)
Default value is 3 (XS1E) / 4: 10
3 (XS8E) /1 (XS20E).
Display averaging R/W 0 to 100 (Default value: 10)
(974) averaging setting. UINT
0: Green - Off 
1: Off - Red
03CFH Head indicator illumina- Indicates the display indi- 2byte
R/W 2: Green - Red
(975) tion mode cator illumination mode. INT
3: Reserved
4: Off
03D0H
(976)
to Reserved - - - -
03DFH
(991)
03E1H
Reserved - - - -
(993)
(994) acter string. (Default : "")
03E3H
(995)
to Reserved - - - -
03E5H
(997)
0: 100%
Screen brightness R/W 1: Off
(998) ness. INT
2: 30% 

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2E
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
03E7H
(999)
to Reserved - - - -
03EBH
(1003)
03ECH 0: Liter 
Flow unit Indicates the flow unit. - -
(1004) 1: Gallon
0: Off 
03EDH Indicates the ch.2 func- 2byte
ch2. function selection R/W 1: Control output
(1005)
03EEH
tion selection.
Indicates the pipe mate-

INT
2byte
2: External input
0: Metal 
3
Pipe material selection R/W
(1006) rial selected. INT 1: Plastic
Communication
03EFH Indicates the output type 2byte 0: NPN 
NPN/PNP selection R/W
(1007) (NPN/PNP) selected. INT 1: PNP
03F0H
(1008)
to Reserved - - - -
03FFH
(1023)
ID Number Count R 2
(1025) IDs. INT
0: No head
0402H Indicates connected 2byte 1: FD-XS1E
Head Type R
(1026) head type. INT 2: FD-XS8E
3: FD-XS20E
0403H
Reserved - - - -
(1027)
0404H 2byte
(1028) INT
0405H senting the major revi- 2byte
Revision R 257
(1029) sionand the lower bytes INT
representing the minor
revision.
0406H Indicates model designa-
Product Name STRING R "FD-XA2E"
(1030) tion of the sensor.
0407H
(1031)
to Reserved - - - -
040DH
(1037)
040EH 2byte
(1038) INT
040FH 2byte
(1039) INT
0410H 2byte
(1040) INT

3-5 Parameter List
FD-XA2E
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0411H
(1041)
to Reserved - - - -
041FH
(1055)

3 Details on the selectable operation commands are given below.

Communication
0301H(769) Initialization request Executes initialization.

0308H(776) Full auto calibration : Start Starts fully automatic calibration.
0309H(777) Full auto calibration : Finish Ends fully automatic calibration.
030AH(778) Perform origin adjustment Executes origin adjustment.
030BH(779) Cancel origin adjustment Cancels origin adjustment.
031DH(797) Perform conditional monitoring Executes conditional monitoring.
031EH(798) Cancel conditional monitoring Cancels conditional monitoring.

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
LR-X Series (Instance ID : 1 to 16)
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
Group1 Entry count R 31
(800) entries in Group 1. INT
Indicates error
bit0 : Overcurrent Error
bit1 : Head Error
bit2 : EEPROM Error
3
information. When an bit3 : Reserved
0321H 2byte
Communication
Error Information error occurs, the R bit4 : Error 1 - 7
(801) WORD
corresponding bit is bit5 : Reserved
turned ON. bit6 : Reserved
bit7 : Sensor
Communication Error
Indicates warning
information. When a
0322H 2byte bit0 : Misaligned
Warning Information warning occurs, the R
(802) WORD bit1 : Waiting for Calibration
turned ON.
status of the warning
function. When the
0323H 2byte bit0 : Misaligned
Warning Function warning function is R
operating, the
turned ON.
status of the sensor.
0324H 2byte bit0 : Output 1
(804) WORD bit1 : Output 2
turned ON.
0325H
(805)
to Reserved - - - -
0328H
(808)
0329H Gyro Monitor Current Indicates the gyro 2byte
R 0 to 65535
(809) Value monitor current value UINT
032A Gyro Monitor Peak Indicates the gyro 2byte
R 0 to 65535
H(810) Value monitor peak value. UINT
Indicates the elapsed
032BH Misaligned Elapsed time from when 2byte
R 0 to 65535
(811) Time misalignment was UINT
detected. (Unit : min)
032CH
(812)
to Reserved - - - -
032EH
(814)
032FH Indicates the status of the 2byte 0 : Output 1
(815) Slide Switch Status*1 slide switch. INT
R
1 : Output 2

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0330H
(816)
to Reserved - - - -
033EH
(830)
033FH Indicates the received 2byte bit0 : 1-Spot Status
Received Light Status R
(831) light status. WORD bit1 : Saturated
3 Setting Value (Output1/ value of output 1. The
Area High) (When upper limit of the setting
0341H using LR-XN12*) value is displayed when 2byte
in Area Detection mode. R/W -9999 to 9999
(833) Setting Value (Output/ INT
Communication
Area High) (When The default value

using LR-XN10) depends on the
connected head.*2
value of output 2. The
upper limit of the setting
0342H Setting Value (Output2/ value is displayed when 2byte
in Area Detection mode. R/W -9999 to 9999
(834) Area High)*1 INT
The default value
depends on the
connected head.*2
0343H
Reserved - - - -
(835)
Setting Value (Output1 of the setting value of
Area Low) (When using Output1 in Area
0344H LR-XN12*) Detection mode. 2byte
R/W -9999 to 9999
(836) Setting Value (Area The default value INT
Low) (When using LR- depends on the
XN10)
connected head.*2
Output2 in Area
0345H Setting Value (Output2 2byte
Detection mode. R/W -9999 to 9999
(837) Area Low)*1 The default value INT
depends on the
connected head.*2
0346H
Reserved - - - -
(838)
0347H
Reserved - - - -
(839)
Indicates the hysteresis
value.
0348H The default value 2byte
Hys. Value R/W 0 to 9999
(840) depends on the UINT
connected head.*2
Indicates the position of
the masked area closer
to the sensor by the
0349H distance from the sensor. 2byte
Masking Range (Near) R/W 0 to 9999
(841) The default value UINT
depends on the
connected head.*2

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
Indicates the position of
the masked area farther
from the sensor by the
034AH distance from the sensor. 2byte
Masking Range (Far) R/W 0 to 9999
(842) The default value UINT
depends on the
connected head.*2
034BH
(843)
to Reserved - - - -
034FH
(847) 3
0350H [Custom]Group2 Entry entries that can be set in 2byte
R 10
Communication
(848) count Group 2 custom save INT
area.
[Custom]Setting Value
(Output1/Area High)
(When using LR- Custom save area for the
0351H 2byte
XN12*) "Setting Value (Output1/ R/W -9999 to 9999
(849) INT
Setting Value (Output/ Area High)".
Area High) (When
using LR-XN10)
[Custom]Setting Value Custom save area for the
0352H 2byte
"Setting Value (Output2/ R/W -9999 to 9999
(850) (Output2/Area High)*1 Area High)".
INT
0353H
Reserved - - - -
(851)
[Custom]Setting Value
(Output1 Area Low)
(When using LR- Custom save area for the
0354H 2byte
XN12*) "Setting Value (Output1 R/W -9999 to 9999
(852) INT
Setting Value (Area Area Low)".
Low) (When using LR-
XN10)
[Custom]Setting Value Custom save area for the
0355H 2byte
"Setting Value (Output2 R/W -9999 to 9999
(853) (Output2 Area Low)*1 Area Low)".
INT
0356H
Reserved - - - -
(854)
0357H
Reserved - - - -
(855)
0358H Custom save area for the 2byte
[Custom]Hys. Value R/W 0 to 9999
(856) "Hys. Value". UINT
0359H [Custom]Masking Custom save area for the 2byte
R/W 0 to 9999
(857) Range (Near) "Masking Range (Near)". UINT
035AH [Custom]Masking Custom save area for the 2byte
R/W 0 to 9999
(858) Range (Far) "Masking Range (Far)". UINT
035BH
(859)
to Reserved - - - -
035FH
(863)

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0 : Unlock 
0361H Indicates the status of the 2byte 1 : Key Lock
Key Lock Status R/W
(865) Key Lock. INT 2 : PIN Code Lock
PIN Code R/W 0 to 9999 (Default : 0)
(866) for the Key Lock. INT
0363H
Reserved - - - -
(867)
0364H (NO/NC). The 2byte bit0 : Output 1
3 (868)
N.O./N.C.
corresponding bit turns
ON in N.C.
WORD
R/W
bit1 : Output 2*1
0 : 500us-limited
1 : 1ms
Communication

Response Time R/W 2 : 3ms
(869) Time. INT
3 : 10ms 
4 : 200ms
0366H Indicates the display 2byte 0 : mm
(870) Unit*3 units. INT
R/W
1 : inch
0367H
Reserved - - - -
(871)
0368H Indicates if Masking is 2byte 0 : OFF 
Masking R/W
(872) enabled. INT 1 : ON
0369H Indicates the hysteresis 2byte 0 : Standard 
Hysteresis R/W
(873) setting. INT 1 : Custom
036AH Indicates if the Bar Graph 2byte 0 : OFF 
Bar Display R/W
(874) is enabled on the display. INT 1 : ON
Indicates the method of
036BH Key Lock when being set 2byte 0 : Normal 
Key Lock Method R/W
(875) via the buttons on the INT 1 : PIN Key Lock
sensor.
Indicates the direction
036CH that will make the 2byte 0 : To Sensor 
Number Direct. R/W
(876) numbers on the display INT 1 : From Sensor
increase
036DH Indicates if the Shift 2byte 0 : ON 
Shift Function R/W
(877) Function is enabled. INT 1 : OFF
036EH Indicates the DATUM 2byte 0 : Standard 
DATUM Status R/W
(878) Status. INT 1 : DATUM
Select the channel that is
036FH Select Channel for 2byte 0 : Output 1 
to be calibrated via R/W
(879) Calibration*1 communication.
INT 1 : Output 2

R 15
area.
0 : Unlock 
0371H [Custom]Key Lock Custom save area for the 2byte 1 : Key Lock
R/W
(881) Status "Key Lock Status". INT 2 : PIN Code Lock
0372H Custom save area for the 2byte
[Custom]PIN Code R/W 0 to 9999 (Default : 0)
(882) "PIN Code". INT
0373H
Reserved - - - -
(883)
0374H Custom save area for the 2byte bit0 : Output 1
[Custom]N.O./N.C. R/W
(884) "N.O./N.C." status. WORD bit1 : Output 2*1

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0 : 500us-limited
1 : 1ms
0375H [Custom]Response Custom save area for the 2byte
R/W 2 : 3ms
(885) Time "Response Time". INT
3 : 10ms 
4 : 200ms
0376H Custom save area for the 0 : mm
(886) [Custom]Unit*3 "Unit".
- -
1 : inch
0377H
Reserved - - - -
(887)
0378H Custom save area for 2byte 0 : OFF 
(888)
0379H
[Custom]Masking
[Custom]Hysteresis
"Masking".
INT
2byte
R/W
R/W
1 : ON
0 : Standard 
3
(889) "Hysteresis". INT 1 : Custom
037AH Custom save area for the 2byte 0 : OFF 
Communication
[Custom]Bar Display R/W
(890) "Bar Display". INT 1 : ON
037BH [Custom]Key Lock Custom save area for the 2byte 0 : Normal 
R/W
(891) Method "Key Lock Method". INT 1 : PIN Key Lock"
037CH [Custom]Number Custom save area for the 2byte 0 : To Sensor 
R/W
(892) Direct. "Number Direct.". INT 1 : From Sensor
037DH Custom save area for the 2byte 0 : ON 
[Custom]Shift Function R/W
(893) "Shift Function". INT 1 : OFF
037EH [Custom]DATUM Custom save area for the 2byte 0 : Standard 
R/W
(894) Status "DATUM Status". INT 1 : DATUM
[Custom]Select Custom save area for the
037FH 0 : Output 1 
Channel for "Calibration Target - -
(895) 1 : Output 2
Calibration*1 Select".
0 : OFF 
Output 1 Timer (When 1 : Off-Delay
0381H using LR-XN12*) Indicates the settings for 2byte 2 : On-Delay
R/W
(897) Output Timer (When the Output 1 Timer. INT 3 : One-Shot
using LR-XN10) 4 : On/Off-Delay
5 : On-Del/1Shot
Indicates the timer
duration for the Output 1
Duration 1-1 (When Timer. Indicates the timer
0382H using LR-XN12*) duration for the "On- 2byte
R/W 1 to 9999 (Default : 10)
(898) Duration 1 (When using delay" when the "Output INT
LR-XN10) 1 Timer" is set to "On/Off-
Delay" or "On-Del/
1Shot". (Unit: ms)
Indicates the timer
duration for the "Off-
Duration 1-2 (When
delay" or the "One-shot"
0383H using LR-XN12*) 2byte
when the "Output 1 R/W 1 to 9999 (Default : 10)
(899) Duration 2 (When using INT
Timer" is set to "On/Off-
LR-XN10)
Delay" or "On-Del/
1Shot". (Unit: ms)
Detection Mode1
(When using LR-
0384H Indicates the detection 2byte 0 : Standard 
XN12*) R/W
(900) mode for Output 1. INT 1 : Area Detection
Detection Mode (When
using LR-XN10)
0385H
Reserved - - - -
(901)
0386H
Reserved - - - -
(902)

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0 : OFF 
1 : Laser OFF
0387H Indicates the external 2byte 2 : External Set
Ext. Input R/W
(903) input setting. INT 3 : Zero Shift
4 : Hold Reset
5 : Gyro Alert Reset
0388H Indicates the clamp 2byte 0 : OFF 
Clamp Function R/W
(904) function status. INT 1 : ON
0389H
Reserved - - - -
(905)
3 038AH
(906)
Fault Detect.
Indicates the fault
detection setting.
2byte
INT
R/W
0 : Disable 
1 : Force OUT ON
2 : Force OUT OFF
038BH
Communication
(907)
to Reserved - - - -
038FH
(911)
R 10
area.
0 : OFF 
[Custom]Output 1
1 : Off-Delay
Timer (When using LR-
0391H Custom save area for the 2byte 2 : On-Delay
XN12*) R/W
(913) "Output 1 Timer". INT 3 : One-Shot
Output Timer (When
4 : On/Off-Delay
using LR-XN10)
5 : On-Del/1Shot
[Custom]Duration 1-1
(When using LR-
XN12*) R/W 1 to 9999 (Default : 10)
(914) "Duration 1-1". INT
Duration 1 (When using
LR-XN10)
[Custom]Duration 1-2
(When using LR-
XN12*) R/W 1 to 9999 (Default : 10)
(915) "Duration 1-2". INT
Duration 2 (When using
LR-XN10)
[Custom]Detection
Mode1 (When using
0394H Custom save area for 2byte 0 : Standard 
LR-XN12*) R/W
(916) "Detection Mode1". INT 1 : Area Detection
Detection Mode (When
using LR-XN10)
0395H
Reserved - - - -
(917)
0396H
Reserved - - - -
(918)
0 : OFF 
1 : Laser OFF
0397H Custom save area for the 2byte 2 : External Set
[Custom]Ext. Input R/W
(919) "Ext. Input". INT 3 : Zero Shift
4 : Hold Reset
5 : Gyro Alert Reset"
0398H [Custom]Clamp Custom save area for the 2byte 0 : OFF 
R/W
(920) Function "Clamp Function". INT 1 : ON
0399H
Reserved - - - -
(921)

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0 : Disable 
039AH Custom save area for the 2byte
[Custom]Fault Detect. R/W 1 : Force OUT ON
(922) "Fault Detect.". INT
2 : Force OUT OFF
039BH
(923)
to Reserved - - - -
039FH
(927)
0 : OFF 
1 : Off-Delay
3
03A1H Indicates the settings for 2byte 2 : On-Delay
(929) Output 2 Timer*1 the Output 2 Timer. INT
R/W
3 : One-Shot
Communication
4 : On/Off-Delay
5 : On-Del/1Shot
Indicates the timer
duration for the Output 2
Timer. Indicates the timer
03A2H duration for the "On- 2byte
(930) Duration 2-1*1 delay" when the "Output INT
R/W 1 to 9999 (Default : 10)
2 Timer" is set to "On/Off-
Delay" or "On-Del/
1Shot". (Unit: ms)
Indicates the timer
duration for the "Off-
delay" or the "One-shot"
03A3H 2byte
(931) Duration 2-2*1 when the "Output 2
INT
R/W 1 to 9999 (Default : 10)
Timer" is set to "On/Off-
Delay" or "On-Del/
1Shot". (Unit: ms)
0 : Standard 
1 : Area Detection
03A4H *1 Indicates the detection 2byte
Detection Mode2 R/W 2 : Error Output
(932) mode for Output 2. INT
3 : Gyro Alert
4 : Error + Gyro
03A5H
Reserved - - - -
(933)
03A6H
Reserved - - - -
(934)
03A7H Indicates the settings for 2byte 0 : OFF 
Gyro Monitor R/W
(935) the Gyro Monitor. INT 1 : ON
0 : Level 1
1 : Level 2
03A8H Indicate the Gyro Monitor 2byte
Gyro Level R/W 2 : Level 3 
(936) sensitivity level. INT
3 : Level 4
4 : Level 5
03A9H
(937)
to Reserved - - - -
03ADH
(941)
03AEH Indicates the status of the 2byte 0 : OFF 
Blink Indicators R/W
(942) Blink Indicators function. INT 1 : ON
03AFH Indicates the status of the 2byte 0 : OFF 
Laser OFF R/W
(943) Laser OFF function. INT 1 : ON

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
03B0H [Custom]Group5 Entry entries that can be set in 2byte
R 15
area.
0 : OFF 
1 : Off-Delay
03B1H [Custom]Output 2 Custom save area for the 2byte 2 : On-Delay
R/W
(945) Timer*1 "Output 2 Timer". INT 3 : One-Shot
4 : On/Off-Delay
5 : On-Del/1Shot
3 03B2H
(946) [Custom]Duration 2-1*1
"Duration 2-1".
2byte
INT
R/W 1 to 9999 (Default : 10)
03B3H Custom save area for 2byte

(947) [Custom]Duration 2-2*1 "Duration 2-2". INT
R/W 1 to 9999 (Default : 10)
Communication
0 : Standard 
[Custom]Detection 1 : Area Detection
03B4H Custom save area for 2byte
R/W 2 : Error Output
(948) Mode2*1 "Detection Mode2". INT
3 : Gyro Alert
4 : Error + Gyro
03B5H
Reserved - - - -
(949)
03B6H
Reserved - - - -
(950)
03B7H Custom save area for 2byte 0 : OFF 
[Custom]Gyro Monitor R/W
(951) "Gyro Monitor". INT 1 : ON
0 : Level 1
1 : Level 2
03B8H Custom save area for the 2byte
[Custom]Gyro Level R/W 2 : Level 3 
(952) "Gyro Level". INT
3 : Level 4
4 : Level 5
03B9H
(953)
to Reserved - - - -
03BFH
(959)
Indicates the direction of
03C1H 2byte 0 : Standard 
Flip Display the display (standard or R/W
(961) INT 1 : Flip Disp
flipped).
0 : OFF 
03C2H Indicates the sub display 2byte
Sub Display R/W 1 : Hold Display
(962) details. INT
2 : TAG
03C3H when the Hold Display is 2byte 0 : Peak/Bottom 
Hold Display R/W
(963) selected under the Sub INT 1 : P Min/B Max
Display.
03C4H
Reserved - - - -
(964)
03C5H
Reserved - - - -
(965)
0 : Normal 
1 : Bar (Distance)
03C6H Indicates the current 2byte
Current Display R/W 2 : Sub
(966) display. INT
3 : Masking Range
4 : Bar (Gyro)
03C7H
Reserved - - - -
(967)

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
0 : Brightness 1
03C8H Indicates the display 2byte
Brightness R/W 1 : Brightness 2
(968) brightness for the sensor. INT
2 : Brightness 3 
03C9H
(969)
to Reserved - - - -
03CDH
(973)
0 : English 
03CEH Indicates the selected 2byte 1 : Japanese
Language R/W
(974) language for the display. INT 2 : Chinese
3 : German 3
03CFH
Reserved - - - -
(975)
Communication
03D0H [Custom]Group6 Entry entries that can be set in 2byte
R 14
area.
03D1H Custom save area for the 2byte 0 : Standard 
[Custom]Flip Display R/W
(977) "Flip Display". INT 1 : Flip Disp.
0 : OFF 
03D2H Custom save area for the 2byte
[Custom]Sub Display R/W 1 : Hold Display
(978) "Sub Display". INT
2 : TAG
03D3H Custom save area for the 2byte 0 : Peak/Bottom 
[Custom]Hold Display R/W
(979) "Hold Display". INT 1 : P Min/B Max
03D4H
Reserved - - - -
(980)
03D5H
Reserved - - - -
(981)
0 : Normal 
1 : Bar (Distance)
03D6H [Custom]Current Custom save area for the 2byte
R/W 2 : Sub
(982) Display "Current Display". INT
3 : Masking Range
4 : Bar (Gyro)"
03D7H
Reserved - - - -
(983)
0 : Brightness 1
03D8H Custom save area for the 2byte
[Custom]Brightness R/W 1 : Brightness 2
(984) "Brightness". INT
2 : Brightness 3 
03D9H
(985)
to Reserved - - - -
03DDH
(989)
0 : English 
03DEH Custom save area for the 2byte 1 : Japanese
[Custom]Language R/W
(990) "Language". INT 2 : Chinese
3 : German
03DFH
Reserved - - - -
(991)
the disable warning
03E1H 2byte bit0 : Misaligned
Warning Disable function. When the bit is R/W
warning will not occur.

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
03E2H Indicates the TAG 8byte 8 characters or less
TAG Strings R/W
(994) character string. STRING (Default: "")*4
03E3H
(995)
to Reserved - - - -
03E5H
(997)
Indicates operating 0 : OFF 
03E6H 2byte
ECO Mode status of the power save R/W 1 : ON
(998) INT
function. 2 : ALL
3 03E7H
(999)
Reserved - - - -
03E8H Select the model of the 2byte 0 : LR-X or None 

Expansion Model R/W
(1000) attached expansion unit. INT 1 : Other
Communication
Indicates number of 0 : OFF 

03E9H 2byte
Interference sensors that will not R/W 1 : 4 units
(1001) INT
experience Interference. 2 : 8 units
Tuning results are stored
03EAH Save by Ext. Input 2byte 0 : No
in EEPROM when R/W
(1002) (Calib.) INT 1 : Yes 
executing Tuning with the
external input.
Zero-shift settings are
03EBH Save by Ext. Input 2byte 0 : No 
stored in EEPROM when R/W
(1003) (Zero-shift) INT 1 : Yes
executing Zero-shift with
the external input.
03ECH
(1004)
to Reserved - - - -
03EFH
(1007)
03F0H [Custom]Group7 Entry entries that can be set in 2byte
R 11
area.
03F1H [Custom]Warning Custom save area for 2byte bit0 : Misaligned
R/W
(1009) Disable "Warning Disable". WORD bit1 : Waiting for Calibration
03F2H Custom save area for the 8byte 8 characters or less
[Custom]TAG Strings R/W
(1010) "TAG Strings". STRING (Default: "")*4
03F3H
(1011)
to Reserved - - - -
03F5H
(1013)
0 : OFF 
03F6H Custom save area for 2byte
[Custom]ECO Mode R/W 1 : ON
(1014) "ECO Mode". INT
2 : ALL
03F7H
Reserved - - - -
(1015)
03F8H [Custom]Expansion Custom save area for 2byte 0 : LR-X or None 
R/W
(1016) Model "Expansion Model". INT 1 : Other
0 : OFF 
03F9H Custom save area for 2byte
[Custom]Interference R/W 1 : 4 units
(1017) "Interference". INT
2 : 8 units
03FAH [Custom]Save by Ext. 2byte 0 : No
"Save by Ext. Input R/W
(1018) Input (Calib.) INT 1 : Yes 
(Calib.)".

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
 : Default value
Attribute Data
ID type
03FBH [Custom]Save by Ext. 2byte 0 : No 
"Save by Ext. Input (Zero- R/W
(1019) Input (Zero-shift) INT 1 : Yes
shift)".
03FCH
(1020)
to Reserved - - - -
03FFH
(1023)
0401H
(1025)
ID number Count
Indicates number of used
IDs.
2byte
INT
R 2 3
0 : Head not connected
0402H Indicates connected 2byte 1 : LR-XH50
Communication
Head Type R
(1026) head type. INT 2 : LR-XH100
3 : LR-XH250
0403H
Reserved - - - -
(1027)
2032 (When using LR-
0404H Indicates the product 2byte XN10)
Product Code R
(1028) code. INT 2033 (When using LR-
XN12*)
Indicates the revision
number, with the upper
0405H 2byte
Revision major revision number R 257
(1029) INT
and the lower bytes
representing the minor
revision number.
"LR-XN10" (When using
Indicates the model
0406H LR-XN10)
Product Name designation of the STRING R
(1030) "LR-XN12*" (When using
sensor.
LR-XN12*)
0407H
(1031)
to Reserved - - - -
040DH
(1037)
2032 (When using LR-
040EH 2byte XN10)
Series Code Indicates the series code. R
(1038) INT 2033 (When using LR-
XN12*)
040FH Indicates the series 2byte
Series Version R 1
(1039) version. INT
0410H 2byte
(1040) INT
0411H
(1041)
to Reserved - - - -
041FH
(1055)
*1 LR-XN12* only.
*2 Default values

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X
- "mm" is selected for "Unit"

Connected head
Attribute ID Name
LR-XH50 LR-XH100 LR-XH250
0341h(833) Setting Value (Output1/Area High) 150 500 120
0342h(834) Setting Value (Output2/Area High) 500 1000 250
0344h(836) Setting Value (Output1 Area Low) 100 300 80
0348h(840) Hys. Value 2 4 2
0349h(841) Masking Range (Near) 0 0 0
034Ah(842) Masking Range (Far) 600 1200 350
3
- "inch" is selected for "Unit"
Communication
Connected head
Attribute ID Name
LR-XH50 LR-XH100 LR-XH250
0341h(833) Setting Value(Output1/Area High) 600 1800 480
0342h(834) Setting Value(Output2/Area High) 2000 4000 1000
0348h(840) Hys. Value 8 16 8
0349h(841) Masking Range (Near) 0 0 0
034Ah(842) Masking Range (Far) 2400 4800 1400
*3 When changing the unit of measurement, select the unit according to the weights
and measures regulations and laws in the country or area where this product is
used. Use of some units may be prohibited depending on the location where this
product is used.
*4 Refer to the "List of Character String Codes" (page 5-45) for the character strings
which can be used with this unit.
Reference • [Custom]*** is a parameter that can save and read settings using the LR-
X series “custom save”.
• “Entry count” indicates the number of parameters in the same group.

3-5 Parameter List
LR-X

0301H(769) Initialize Executes initialization.

0302H(770) Custom Save Save the current settings to the "Custom Save" area.
0303H(771) Maximum Sensitivity Calib. Start Starts Full auto calibration.
0304H(772)
0305H(773)
Maximum Sensitivity Calib. End
Two-point Calibration: 1st

Ends Full auto calibration.
Starts calibration of the 1st point of the 2-point calibra-
3
tion.
Communication
Starts calibration of the 2nd point of the 2-point cali-
0306H(774) Two-point Calibration: 2nd
bration.
0308H(776) Full Auto Calibration: Start Starts fully automatic calibration.
0309H(777) Full Auto Calibration: Finish Ends fully automatic calibration.
030AH(778) Zero-shift Request Executes zero shift.
030EH(782) DATUM Calibration: Start Starts DATUM calibration.
030FH(783) DATUM Calibration: Finish Ends DATUM calibration.
0310H(784) Reset Hold Value (Distance) Resets the held values for distance.
0316H(790) Reset User Load the settings from the "Custom Save" area.
0317H(791) Reset Hold Value (Gyro) Resets the Gyro Monitor Peak Value
Temporarily cancels masking and changes the
response time to 1 ms. After recalibration, it enables
0318H(792) 500us Response Time Cancel
masking and returns the response time to 500us
again.
0319H(793) Gyro Alert Reset Resets gyro alert.

3-5 Parameter List
MEMO
3
Communication

Specifications
4
4-1 Specifications ..................................................... 4-2
4-2 Data Processing Time ........................................ 4-3
4-3 Dimensions......................................................... 4-4

4-1 Specifications
The specifications of the NU-EP1 are explained in this section.

Product name EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit
Model NU-EP1
IEEE802.3 (10BASE-T)
Compliant standards IEEE802.3u (100BASE-TX)
IEEE802.3af (Power over Ethernet, Class 3)
10 Mbps (10BASE-T)
Transmission rate
Ethernet 100 Mbps (100BASE-TX)
specifications STP cable or Category 3 or higher UTP cable (10BASE-T)*1
Transmission medium
STP cable or Category 5 or higher UTP cable (100BASE-TX)
Maximum cable length 100 m (Distance between NU-EP1 and Ethernet switch)
Maximum number of
4 (10BASE-T) 2 (100BASE-TX)
connectable hubs*2
Cyclic communication
Compatible functions
Compatible with UCMM and Class 3 messaging (Explicit messaging)
Number of connections 64
4 EtherNet/IP
RPI (Transmission cycle)
Tolerable communication
bandwidth for cyclic
0.5 to 10000 ms (in 0.5 ms)
6000 pps
communication
Specifications
Message communication Compatible with UCMM and Class 3

Conformance test Compatible with Version A7
Connectable sensors Sensor amplifiers with N-bus support*3
Number of connectable
sensor units Up to 16 units*4
Sensor connection Power supply Power is supplied from NU-EP1 via wiring-saving connector.
specifications
Allowable passing current*5 Overall 1200 mA or less
Power during PoE Supply voltage: 24 V ± 10 %, supply current: 360 mA
power receiving*6 or less*7
Link/activity indicator (LINK/ACT): Green LED
Module status indicator (MS): 2-color (green/red) LED
Indicator lamps
Network status indicator (NS): 2-color (green/red) LED
Sensor communication indicator (D-bus): 2-color (green/red) LED
24 VDC ± 10%, ripple (p-p) 10% or less, (with power supply connector)
Power voltage
48 VDC (Max. 57 VDC) (During PoE power receiving)
Power consumption 1500 mW or less (at 24 V 60 mA max)*8
Operating surrounding
-20 to 55 °C (no freezing)
air temperature
Environmental Operating surrounding
35 to 85% RH (no condensation)
resistance air humidity
Vibration resistance 10 to 55 Hz compound amplitude 1.5 mm, 2 hours each in X, Y, Z directions
Pollution degree 2
Main unit case: Polycarbonate
Materials
Power supply connector: Polyamide (plug), PBT (socket)
Weight (including connectors) Approx. 80 g
Accessories Instruction manual x 1, power connector x 1, end unit x 2
*1 When using the power PoE power receiving function, use the STP cable or Category 5 or
higher UTP cable.
*2 The number of connectable units is not limited when using a switch.
*3 "N-bus" is the name of KEYENCE's wiring-saving system for sensor amplifiers.
*4 Varies with the sensor amplifiers connected.
*5 Current value which, when supplying power from the power supply connector, can be sup-
plied to the NU-EP1 or to a sensor amplifier unit connected to the NU-EP1.
*6 Power which can be supplied to the sensor amplifier when using the PoE power receiving
function.
*7 Varies according to the working ambient temperature.
(-20 to 45 °C: 360 mA or less, 45 to 50 °C: 260 mA or less, 50 to 55 °C: 140 mA or less)
*8 Does not include power supplied to connected sensor amplifier.

4-2 Data Processing Time
This section shows an example of data processing times for cyclic communication.
CPU unit EtherNet/IP NU-EP1 Sensor amplifier

scanner
KV-EP21V
Ver.2
㧔1㧕㧔2㧕㧔3㧕㧔4㧕
TM
EtherNet/IP
4
Maximum data processing time = (1) + (2) + (3) + (4)
(1) PLC scan time
Specifications
(2) RPI (Requested Packet Interval).
(3) NU-EP1 data communication time
(4) Sensor amplifier communication time
(2) RPI is set with the EtherNet/IP scanner in 0.5 ms increments between 0.5 ms and
10000 ms.
(3) The NU-EP1 data communication time is shown below.
Number of connected Connection

sensor amplifiers Fast output Others
1 to 3 units 4.5 ms
4 to 6 units 6.0 ms
0.05 ms
7 to 9 units 8.0 ms
10 to 16 units 10.0 ms
Refer to each unit's manual for details on the (1) and (4) times.

4-3 Dimensions
25.6 <<Unit : mm>>
29.4
15
4
38.5
(42.5)
20.3
Specifications
15
(0.2)
43.5 35.4
94.5 17.6

Appendix
5
5-1 Device Profile ..................................................... 5-2
5-2 Troubleshooting.................................................. 5-3
5-3 Default Settings .................................................. 5-6
5-4 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley
ControlLogix PLC ............................................... 5-7
5-5 Objects for Use with the NU-EP1 ..................... 5-18
5-6 Functions which Cannot be Set in Duplicate.... 5-35
5-7 Current Value Property of the Sensor .............. 5-44
5-8 List of Character String Codes ......................... 5-45
5-9 Index................................................................. 5-46

5-1 Device Profile
Class Item Details

Vendor name Keyence Corporation
Vendor ID 367
Device type 0 (Generic Device)
General data
Revision 1.1
Product code 2501
Product name NU-EP1
5
Appendix

5-2 Troubleshooting
The indicator lamps on the NU-EP1 are used to determine the cause of the error and
the necessary corrective actions.
Link/activity indicator (green)
Module status indicator (green, red)
Network status indicator (green, red)
Sensor communication indicator (green, red)
 Link/activity indicator (LINK/ACT)

This lamp indicates whether the NU-EP1 is communicating correctly.
LED status Condition Corrective action

Solid Link correctly established. -
Green Link correctly established, and
Flashing -
exchanging data.
• Check that the power is correctly 5
connected to the power terminal.
• Check that the power for the con-
Appendix
• Power is not supplied to the
nected device or Ethernet switch is
Not lit NU-EP1.
correctly connected.
• Link is not established.
• Check that the cables are correctly
connected.
• Check that the IP address is correct.
When using the PoE function, always connect to an IEEE802.3af-compli-

ant PoE power device. The following Keyence devices do not support
NOTICE IEEE802.3af or the PoE function. Never connect a PoE device as there is
a risk of damage.
[DT-100A], [DT-500], [NE-V08]

5-2 Troubleshooting
 Module status indicator (MS)

This lamp indicates whether the NU-EP1 is operating correctly.

The NU-EP1 is operating
Green Solid -
correctly.
A system error may be
Solid Contact your nearest Keyence office.
occurring in the NU-EP1.
One or more error or warning
Correct the error or warning that is occurring in
Red is occurring in a connected
the connected sensor(s).
Flashing sensor.
The IP address may be dupli-
Check whether the IP address is duplicated.
cated.
• Check that the power is correctly connected to
the power terminal.
• When using the PoE function, check that the
power for the connected device or Ethernet
Power is not supplied to the switch is correctly connected.
Not lit
NU-EP1. • When using the PoE function, check that the
5 Ethernet switch is connected to a PoE compat-
ible port. Even if the Ethernet switch is PoE
compatible, some devices do not supply power
Appendix
to some ports.
* Red LED flashing can be set to "off" for message communication.
 Network status indicator (NS)

This lamp indicates whether the NU-EP1 is conducting EtherNet/IP communication
correctly.

One or more connection is When using multiple connections, communication may
Solid
Green established. not be possible, even when the lamp is green.
Flashing Connection is not established. Check that the NU-EP1 is registered in the scanner.
Duplicate IP address was Check whether the IP address setting is the
Solid
detected. same as the scanner or other adaptor.
Red Locate the connection which has timed out, and
One or more connection has
Flashing check the power and wiring of the communication
timed out.
device.
• Check that the power is correctly connected to
the power terminal.
• When using the PoE function, check that the
power for the connected device or Ethernet
Power is not supplied to the switch is correctly connected.
NU-EP1. • When using the PoE function, check that the
Not lit Ethernet switch is connected to a PoE compat-
ible port. Even if the Ethernet switch is PoE
compatible, some devices do not supply power
to some ports.
Set the IP address.
IP address is not assigned.
"IP address settings" (page 2-11)

5-2 Troubleshooting
 Sensor communication indicator (N-bus)

This lamp indicates whether the NU-EP1 is communicating correctly with the sensor
amplifier.
If an error occurs, the cause can be identified by reading the error code with cyclic
communication or message communication.

Solid
Communicating correctly. -
green
The NU-EP1 is starting up after After starting, the NU-EP1 will automatically
power ON. shift to the normal state.
The number of connected sensor
Confirm that the NU-EP1 and sensor amplifi-
amplifiers increased after power on.
Flashing ers are correctly connected.
(Error ID number/code: 00H/56)
green
The number of ID numbers occupied
by the connected sensor amplifiers Make sure that 16 or less ID numbers are
exceeds 16. occupied.
Communication with the sensor
5
amplifier failed when starting. • Confirm that the NU-EP1 and sensor
Appendix
(Error ID number/code: 00H/53) amplifiers are correctly connected, and
The number of connected sensor then turn the NU-EP1 power off and on.
amplifiers increased after power on. • Check whether a connected sensor ampli-
Solid red (Error ID number/code: 00H/54) fier is incompatible with the NU-EP1, and
The NU-EP1 and sensor amplifier then turn the NU-EP1 power off and on.
combination is not within the speci- • If the error is not resolved after checking
fied range. the above matters, contact your nearest
A system error may be occurring in Keyence office.
the NU-EP1.
Confirm that there are no sources of noise
Communication with the sensor
Flashing around the NU-EP1.
amplifier was temporarily cut off.
red (The error is automatically reset when the
cause is removed.)
• Check that the power is correctly con-
nected to the power terminal.
Not lit Power is not supplied to the NU-EP1. • When using the PoE function, check that
the power for the connected device or
Ethernet switch is correctly connected.

5-3 Default Settings
When the reset switch is held down for three seconds or longer, the NU-EP1 can be
reset and initialized to the default settings. This can also be done by using message
communication.
The default settings are shown below.
Setting item Value after initialization

Communication speed 10/100Mbps automatic
IP address setting method BOOTP
IP address 0.0.0.0*
Net mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway 0.0.0.0
Sensor status mask setting MS LED flashes in red at sensor error/warning.
Sensor output setting Fast output
Multicast TTL 1
Multicast assignment method 0 (Automatic)
5 Number of multicast addresses
Multicast address
32
239.255.0.0
Appendix
* Only the BOOTP client function can be used when the IP address is 0.0.0.0.
The IP address must be set to use any other function.

5-4 Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
This section explains the procedures for communicating with the NU-EP1 using an
Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC (EtherNet/IP scanner).
Procedures for Communicating with an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC
The NU-EP1 is capable of the following communication when connected to an Allen-

Bradley ControlLogix PLC.
• Cyclic communication function maximum data size: 496 bytes
• Message communication function: Class3/UCMM
 Changing the cyclic communication settings

Refer to the PLC instruction manual for details on the PLC unit configuration and set-
tings such as RsLinx, required for communicating with the PC.
1 Select the EIP communication module (1756-ENBT) connected with the

NU-EP1 from RsLogix500 I/O Configuration, and then select "New Mod-
ule" with a right click.
5
Appendix

2 Add "ETHERNET-MODULE (Generic Ethernet Module)".
3 Change the settings as required.
5
Appendix
Name
Set a random name. The following tags are generated based on the name set
here, and are used as the data exchanged with cyclic communication.
• (Name): I Data received from NU-EP1
• (Name): O Data sent to NU-EP1
• (Name): C Not used.
Comm Format
Designate [Data INT].
IP Address
Designate the NU-EP1's IP address.
Input (NU-EP1 send data size)
• Instance number: 100 (decimal)
• Data size: Random value up to 32
Output (NU-EP1 receive data size)
• Instance number 101 (decimal)
• Data size: Random value up to 1
Configuration
• Instance number: 1 (decimal)
• Data size: 0

Reference • For the details of InputOnly connection, refer to "Sending data

to multiple PLCs (InputOnly)" (page 5-9).
• Refer to "Usable Connections" (page 3-9) for details on the
connection.
RPI
Designate the cyclic communication interval.
5
Designate a value between 0.5 and 3200 ms.
Appendix
4 Download the settings to the PLC.
EtherNet/IP communication is enabled after the settings are downloaded and
the status is switched to online.
 Sending data to multiple PLCs (InputOnly)
By connecting to multiple PLCs with the InputOnly connection format, multiple
PLCs can receive the data sent from the NU-EP1. Each PLC must be set as
shown below to use the InputOnly connection.
Setting item Bidirectional communication PLC PLC connected with

(maximum 1 unit) InputOnly
RPI value Random value Same value as left
InputAssembly Instance number No. 100 (decimal) Same value as left
InputAssembly data size Random value Same value as left
OutputAssembly Instance number No. 101 (decimal) No. 254 (decimal)
OutputAssembly data size Random value 0 bite
Comm Format Data-INT Input Data INT

Point To carry out cyclic communication with multiple PLCs using

the InputOnly connection, the NU-EP1 input data must be sent
as a Multicast packet. With ControlLogix, the NU-EP1 transmis-
5 sion is fixed to Multicast packet, so the data can be sent with-

out any problems. However, caution is required when using
devices, such as KV or SYSMAC, for which the connection
Appendix
method can be selected from Multicast or Point to Point.
 Changing the message communication settings

After completing "Changing the cyclic communication settings" (page 5-7), issue
the MSG instruction from the ladder program to execute message communication.)
Reference
• Refer to "Logix500 Controllers General Instructions" (1756-RM003) for
details on the MSG instructions.
• Select Inhibit Module when not using cyclic communication.
1 Define the following tags under the RsLogix5000 "Controller Tags" field.
• Tag for storing control information for MSG instruction (message- Message
type)
• Tag for storing data exchanged with MSG instruction (tx_param, rx_param -
INT type)

2 Add the MSG instruction to the RsLogix5000 ladder.
3 Open the "Configuration" tab in the Message instruction setting dialog,

and change the MSG instruction setting.
Appendix
Message Type
Select "CIP Generic".
ServiceType, Class, Instance, Attribute
Designate a value which matches the message to be sent.
• Example 1: Writing data to NU Object "Setting value (area upper limit)"
when writing data to attributes
Item Setting value

ServiceType SetAttributeSingle
ServiceCode - (Cannot be designated)
Class 66H
Instance 01H
Attribute 0341H
SourceElement Name of tag storing send data
SourceLength 2 byte (attribute size is 2)
Destination - (Cannot be designated)

• Example 2: Retrieving NU Object "Sensor Ready" data when reading attri-

butes
Item Setting value

ServiceType GetAttributeSingle
ServiceCode - (cannot be designated)
Class 66H
Instance 0AH
Attribute 85H
SourceElement - (cannot be designated)
SourceLength - (cannot be designated)
Destination Name of tag storing received data.
4 Open the "Communication" tab, and change the MSG communication set-
tings.
5
Appendix
Path
Designate the device name set in "Configuration for cyclic communication". (An
example for the NUEP1 device is shown above.)
Connected, Cache Connections
• For UCMM connection: Invalidate bidirectional (default setting)
• For Class3 connection: Validate bidirectional
5 Describe the process for setting the send data and retrieving the receive
data with the ladder program, and download it to the PLC.

Procedures for Communication with an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 PLC
The NU-EP1 is capable of the following communication when connected to an Allen-

Bradley SLC5/05 PLC.
• Message communication function: Class3
Point The size of attribute ID used for SLC5/05 Series is 1 byte or smaller.
The SLC5/05 Series does not support the parameter which contains 2
byte attribute ID.
Reference
• The SLC5/05 Series does not support the cyclic communication function,
but by accessing the NU-EP1's Assembly Object with messages, control
can be executed with the same data type and procedures as cyclic com-
munication.
• Up to 248 bytes can be exchanged with the SLC5/05 series message
communication.
5
- Do not exceed this size when exchanging data with message commu-
Appendix
nication.
- The Assembly Object data size is the same as the cyclic communica-
tion data size set in the NU-EP1 properties. When using the SLC5/05,
confirm that this value is 248 bytes.

 Changing the message communication configuration

Message communication is carried out with a ladder program using EEM instructions.
Reference
Refer to the "SLC 500 Instruction Set Reference Manual" (1747-RM001),
etc., for details on the EEM instructions.
1 Define the following file in the RsLogix500 "Data Files" field.
5
Appendix
• File storing EEM instruction control information (message-Integer type)

• File storing data exchanged with EEM instruction (tx_param, rx_param -
Integer type)
2 Add EMM instruction to RsLogix500 ladder.

3 Designate the File used in the EEM instruction defined in Step 1 for the
EEM instruction Control Block, and open the SetupScreen.
Service, Class, Instance, Attribute

Designate a value which matches the message to be sent.
• Example 1: Retrieving NU Object "Sensor ready" data when reading attri-
butes
ServiceType
Item Setting value
Generic Set Attribute Single
5
ServiceCode - (Cannot be designated)
Appendix
Class 66H
Instance 0H
Attribute 85H
Data Table Address (Send data) - (Cannot be designated)
Size In Words (Send data) - (Cannot be designated)
Data Table Address (Received data) Name of file storing send data
Size In Words (Received data) 1 word (attribute size is 1)

• Example 2: To control with same format and procedure as set cycle data,
Access the Assembly Object attribute3: data.
- 1) Retrieving the NU-EP1 input data
Item Setting value

Service ReadAssembly
ServiceCode 0EHex (Cannot be designated)
Class 04Hex (Cannot be designated)
Instance 64Hex (Monitor Data)
Attribute 03Hex (Cannot be designated)
Data Table Address (Send data) (Cannot be designated)
Size In Words (Send data) (Cannot be designated)
Data Table Address (Received data) Name of file storing send data
Size In Words (Received data) 64 words
Data following the format assigned to the NU-EP1
Value of file storing send data set cycle data communication allocation can be
5 retrieved.
* The message exchanged with SLC5/05 can have up to 124 words (248
bytes). Confirm that the cyclic communication data size is set to 248 in the
Appendix
NU-EP1 properties.
- 2) Setting the NU-EP1 output data
Item Setting value

Service WriteAssembly
ServiceCode 10Hex (Cannot be designated)
Class 04Hex (Cannot be designated)
Instance 65Hex (External Input)
Attribute 03Hex (Cannot be designated)
Data Table Address (Send data) Name of file storing send data
Size In Words (Send data) 2 words
Data Table Address (Received data) (Cannot be designated)
Size In Words (Received data) (Cannot be designated)
Designate with data having a format following the
Value of file storing send data
NU-EP1 set cycle data communication allocation.
* The message exchanged with SLC5/05 can have up to 124 words (248
bytes). Confirm that the cyclic communication data size is set to 248 in the
NU-EP1 properties.

4 Open the "MultiHop" tab, and set the NU-EP1 IP address.
The above screen is an example of when the NU-EP1 IP address is

192.168.0.10.
5 Open the "Send Data" tab and "Receive Data" tab, and check the contents
of the file containing the send and receive data.
Appendix
6 Describe the process for setting the send data and retrieving the receive
data in a ladder program, and download it to the PLC.

5-5 Objects for Use with the NU-EP1
This section explains the objects for use with the NU-EP1.
List of Usable Objects
The following objects can be used with the NU-EP1.
Object name Class ID Instance ID

Identity Object 1(01H) 1(01H)
Message Router Object 2(02H) 1(01H)
Assembly Object 4(04H) 100(64H) to 102(66H)
Connection Manager Object 6(06H) 1(01H)
NU Object 102(66H) 0(00H) to 16(10H)
TCP/IP Interface Object 245(F5H) 1(01H)
Ethernet Link Object 246(F6H) 1(01H)
Refer to "How to Use NU Objects" (page 3-32) for details on the NU Objects.
5
Reading Each Object Table
Appendix
Reading the class attributes and instance attributes

Example) Excerpt from NU Object class attributes
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Data type Parameter range
01H Vendor ID Indicates the vendor ID. R UINT 367
Item Details
(1) Attribute ID Expresses the attribute ID as a hexadecimal.
(2) Name Indicates the attribute name.
(3) Description Describes the attribute.
Indicates the direction of services on the attribute ID.
R (Read): The attribute values can be read using Get_Attribute_Single
(4) Attribute and Get_Attributes_All.
W (Write): A value can be written into the attributes using Set_At-
tribute_Single.
(5) Data type Indicates the attribute data type.
Indicates the range of the data read from the attributes or the parameters
(6) Parameter range
which can be set.

Data type
The data type is defined in the following manner by the EtherNet/IP specifications.
Range
Data type Description
Minimum Maximum
INT Signed 16-bit integer -32768 32767
UINT Unsigned 16-bit integer 0 65535
USINT Signed 8-bit integer 0 255
UDINT Unsigned 32-bit integer 0 232-1
WORD Bit string: 16-bit - -
DWORD Bit string: 32-bit - -
BYTE Bit string: 8-bit - -
Character string (1-byte length information +
SHORT_STRING - -
1-byte per 1-character array)
Character string (2-byte length information +
STRING - -
1-byte per 1-character array)
Identify Object (Class ID: 01H) 5
Appendix
This object provides the NU-EP1 identification information, general information and
resetting service, etc.
 Class
 Class service
Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Get_Attributes_All (01H) are supported.
 Class attribute (instance ID: 00H)
Data Parameter
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute
type range
01H Revision Object revision R UINT 0001H
Maximum instance num-
02H Max Instance R UINT 0001H
ber
Number of Number of instances in
03H R UINT 0001H
Instances generated object
Maximum ID
Maximum attribute ID of
06H number Class R UINT 0007H
class attribute
Attributes
Maximum ID
Maximum ID number of
07H number Instance R UINT 0007H
instance attribute
Attributes
 Instance
 Instance service
Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Get_Attributes_All (01H) and Reset service (05H) are
supported.
"Reset service" (page 5-21)
Identity Object
 Instance attribute (instance ID: 01H)
Data Parameter
type range
01H Vendor ID Vendor ID R UINT 016FH
02H Device Type General device type R UINT 0000
03H Product Code Product ID R UINT 09C5H
Revision IdentityObject revision Structure -
04H Major Revision Major revision R USINT 01H
Minor Revision Minor revision USINT 01H
05H Status NU-EP1 status R WORD Reference 1
06H Serial Number Serial number R UDINT Serial number
SHORT-
07H Product Name Product name R "NU-EP1"
STRING
Reference 1) Details of status (16-bit)
5 Bit Name Description

ON: On when one or more Class 1 or Class 3 connections
0 Owned
are opened.
Appendix
1 Reserved Always OFF.

2 Reserved Always ON.
3 Reserved Always OFF.
Bit 4 to 7 change in the following matter according to the
NU-EP1 status.
0101(1): Unrecoverable fault status (1)
Extended Device 0010(2): Not (1). One or more connection has timed out.
4 to 7
Status 0011(3): Not (1) or (2), and connection is not established.
0110(4): Not (1), (2) or (3), and there is one or more RUN
status connection.
0111: Status excluding (1) to (4)
Minor Recoverable
8 Always OFF.
Fault
Minor Unrecover-
9 Always OFF.
able Fault
MajorRecoverable ON: Turns ON when a recoverable unit error occurs. Red
10
Fault MS LED flashes.
Major Unrecover- ON: Turns ON when an unrecoverable unit error
11
able Fault (EEPROM read error, etc.) occurs. Red MS LED turns on.
12 to 15 Reserved Always OFF.

Identity Object
Reset service
The Reset service is a CIP standard function used to emulate the same operations
which can only be executed when the power is reset. When this function is received,
the NU-EP1 stops each function, cuts off the communication and reads in the settings
again. The Reset service is used as a restart request to apply changed parameters
(e.g., IP address, Ethernet communication speed, etc.).
Execute the Reset service by designating 01H for the Identify object Instance ID.
Point • Commands received during the reset process may be discarded.

• The response in respect to the Reset service is returned before the
NU-EP1 starts the reset process.
Service code Service name Service data (1-byte)

00H: Emulates power reset.
01H: Returns to default settings, and emulates power
05H Reset
reset.
Refer to "Default Settings" (page 5-6) 5
• If any other value is designated, 03H (Invalid parameter
value) will be returned to the general status.
Appendix
 List of general statuses returned to each service
General Extended
Name Details
status status
Get_Attri- 00H - The process ended normally.
butes_All 05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
00H - The process ended normally.
Reset 03H - The designated reset method is incorrect.
05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
Get_At-
tribute_Single
14H - The designated attribute ID does not exist.
Others 08H - The designated service is not supported.

Message Router Object (Class ID: 02H)
This object provides the communication point for message communication.
 Class
 Class service
Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) is supported.
Data Parameter
type range
01H Revision Object revisions R UINT 0001H
02H Max Instance Maximum instance number R UINT 0001H
03H R UINT 0001H
Maximum ID
5 06H number Class
Attributes
Maximum attribute ID of
class attribute
R UINT 0007H
Maximum ID
Appendix
number Maximum ID number of

07H R UINT 0002H
Instance instance attribute
Attributes
 Instance
Data Parameter
type range
List of supported
Object_list Structure -
objects
Number of supported
Number UINT 0007H
classes in class array
0001H
01H R 0002H
0004H
Array of
Classes List of class IDs 0006H
UINTs
00F5H
00F6H
0066H
Maximum number of
02H Number Available R UINT 0040H
connections

Message Router Object
General Extended
Name Details
status status
Get_Attribute_Single 05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
Assembly Object (Class ID: 04H)
This object is used to directly access and control the same data as that exchanged
with cyclic communication using message communication. This can be used to send
data to a device which does not support cyclic communication.
 Class
 Class service 5
Appendix
Data Parameter
type range
 Instance
Get_Attribute_Single (0EH) and Set_Attribute_Single (10H) are supported.
 Instance attribute (instance ID: 64H to 66H)
Instance ID is assigned when using instances to set tags.
Instance ID: 64H to 66H
Data
Attribute ID Name Description Attribute Parameter range
type
Data assigned to Instance Array of Set data assigned
03H Data R/W*1
ID BYTEs to instance ID*2*3
Set size assigned
Number of bytes assigned
04H Size R UINT to instance ID(byte
to intendance ID
unit)

Assembly Object
*1 When the target instance ID is 64H or 66H, the attribute is R.

*2 The synchronism is ensured by instance IDs if read with Get_Attribute_Single.
*3 Refer to the following sections for details on data assigned to each instance ID.
Instance ID: 64H "Monitor data" (page 3-11)
Instance ID: 65H "External input" (page 3-17)
Instance ID: 66H "Fast output" (page 3-13)
General Extended
Name Details
status status
The designated instance ID does not
05H -
Get_Attribute_Single exist.
The designated attribute ID does not
14H -
exist.
5 00H - The process ended normally.

The designated instance ID does not
05H -
exist.
Appendix
Instance ID for which attribute is read (R)

08H -
was designated.
Service was executed on instance in
Set_Attribute_Single 0CH -
cyclic communication.
0EH - Cannot write to designated attribute ID.
The designated attribute ID does not
14H -
exist.
Data exceeding the defined size was
15H -
written.

Connection Manager Object (Class ID: 06H)
This object is used for connection type communication. Use this to establish a con-
nection with the NU-EP1.
 Class
 Class service/class attribute
There are no class services or class attributes.
 Instance
Forward_Close (4EH) and Forward_Open (54H) are supported. Refer to the CIP
specifications for details on the services.
 Instance attribute
There are no instance attributes.

5
Appendix
General Extended
Name Details
status status
Forward_ 04H - Attribute ID was not designated.
Close 05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
13H - Length of send data is too short.
0100H The designated connection is already in use.
0103H The designated trigger cannot be used.
• The target  originator direction connection point desig-
nated with the ForwardOpen connection path in cyclic
0106H communication is already in use, and is Point to Point.
• The type of connection trying to be opened is Point to Point.
• The size currently in use differs from the size being opened.
Forward_ • The send direction connection is not Point to Point.
Open 0108H • The receive direction connection parameter is not Point to
01H
Point or Multicast.
The size trying to be opened is larger than the NU-EP1 con-
0109H
nection size.*1
• The time out multiplier is larger than 7.
0111H
• An RPI less than 500 µs or larger than 10s was designated.*2
0114H The Vendor ID does not match. The Product Code does not match.
0115H The DeviceType does not match.
0116H The revision does not match.

Connection Manager Object
General Extended
Name Details
status status
• The ForwardOpen network connection parameter Connec-
tion Size is 0.
• The ForwardOpen Connection Point does not contain a
ConnectionPoint.
• For the ForwardOpen Connection Path class ID, a value
other than 04H was set for cyclic, or a value other than 02H
for Class 3.
• A value other than 1 was set with Class 3 for the instance
ID of the ForwardOpen Connection Path.
0315H • There is a setting unique for the product data segment.
• An illegal Connection Point was designated with cyclic
communication for the send direction of the ForwardOpen
Connection Path.
• A value other than 2 was set with cyclic communication for
the ForwardOpen send direction network connection
parameter Connection Size.
• An illegal Connection Point was designated with cyclic
communication for the receive direction of the For-
wardOpen Connection Path.
• An error occurred during communication between sensors.
0322H • The IP assignment failed when starting.
5 01H
• A sensor was disconnected during operation.
A sensor amplifier which is not compatible with the NU-EP1
0323H
was connected.
Appendix
• A sensor was disconnected during operation.

Forward_ 0327H • Only the NU-EP1 is reset. Reading of data from the sen-
Open sor continues.
0328H A sensor was disconnected during operation.
04C2H The NU-EP1 unique setting is incorrect.
The corresponding device is not connected, an error
0640H-067FH occurred during communication between sensors, or the
sensor amplifier information is being collected again.
The 2nd or following output of a sensor amplifier having sev-
0680H-06BFH
eral outputs was designated.
06C0H-06FFH The number of occupied slots is different.
When "Check Model Match" is selected for compatibility
0700H-073FH
check, the ProductCode does not match.
When "Check Model Match" is selected for compatibility check, the
0740H-077FH
major revisions or minor revisions does not match.
When "Check Series" is selected for compatibility check, the
0780H-07BFH
series code does not match.
When "Check Series" is selected for compatibility check, the
07C0H-07FFH
actual series version is smaller than the setting.
The maximum number of connections has already been
02H -
used.
04H - The attribute ID has been designated.
13H - The length of send data is too short.
15H - The length of send data is too long.
*1 Successful if smaller than the NU-EP1 connection size. If this error occurs, the expansion
status is added and the data size defined in the second expansion status is returned.
*2 RPI is set in increments of 500 µs. If a value which cannot be divided by 500 µs is
set, an RPI rounded to the nearest 500 µs is set.

TCP/IP Interface Object (Class ID: F5H)
This object provides a system to set the TCP/IP network interface. The IP address,
subnet mask and gateway, etc., can be set.
 Class
 Class service
Data Parameter
type range
03H R UINT 0001H
5
 Instance
Appendix
• Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Set_Attribute_Single (10H) and Get_Attributes_All
(01H) are supported.
• If the internal process of the previous Set_Attribute_Single is not completed, the
general status "0CH" (Object State Conflict) will be returned in response to the
Set_Attribute_Single executed to the writable AttributeID.
• Changes to the writable AttributeID are applied when executing the reset service
after power is turned on again.

TCP/IP Interface Object
Data Parameter
type range
01H Status Interface status R DWORD (Reference 1)
Configuration Method of acquiring initial
02H R DWORD (Reference 2)
Capability IP address
Configuration Method device acquires
03H R/W DWORD (Reference 3)
Control default settings at start-up
PhysicalLink
Path to physical link object Structure -
Object
04H Path size Path size (byte) R UINT 0004H
Segment for designating Padded
Path 20F62401H
physical link object EPATH
Interface TCP/IP network interface
Structure -
Configuration setting
Device IP address
IP Address
(IP address)
UDINT Setting value*1
5 Network Mask
Device network mask
(subnet mask)
Gateway Default gateway address
05H R/W UDINT Setting value*1
Appendix
Address (Gateway address)

Primary name server
Name Server
(DNS server)
Secondary name server
Name Server 2
(reserved)
Default domain name ""(Character
Domain Name STRING
(reserved) string can be set)
""(Character
06H Host Name Host name R/W STRING
string can be set)
1 (1 to 255)
08H TTL Value TTL value for multicast R/W USINT
setting value*1

Data Parameter
type range
Mcast Config Multicast address setting Structure -
0: Automatic
Multicast address setting allocation
Alloc Control function (multicast alloca- USINT 1: User-desig-
tion method) nated alloca-
tion
Reserved Reserved USINT 00H
For automatic
allocation:
Number of multicast 0020H
09H R/W
Num Mcast addresses(Number of mul- UINT For user-desig-
ticast addresses) nated alloca-
tion: 1 to 256*1
For automatic
allocation:*2
Start multicast
Mcast Start For user-desig-
Addr
address(Allocation start
multicast address)
UDINT
nated alloca-
tion: Setting
5
value*1
Appendix
*1 If an invalid value is written in, the general status 09H (Invalid Attribute Value) is
returned.
*2 When automatically assigning, the start multicast address is calculated with
239.192.1.0+ ((IP address host section -1) * 03FF) x 32).
(Example)
When IP address is 192.168.0.10, the multicast address is as follows.
Start address = 239.192.1.0 + (((192.168.0.10 - 1) & 0x3FF) << 5)
= 239.192.1.0 + ((192.168.0.9 & 0x3FF) << 5)
= 239.192.1.0 + (0.0.0.9 << 5)
= 239.192.1.0 + 0.0.1.32
= 239.192.2.32
Reference 1) Status list
Bit Name Details

0: IP address is not set (BOOTP start state).
Interface
0 to 3 1: IP address is set.B
ConfigurationStatus
2 or higher: Not returned with the NU-EP1.
Changes to 1 if "TTL Value" or "Mcast Config" is set.
4 Mcast Pending Cleared to 0 when power is turned off an on, or at
Prog->Run after the setting is changed.
5 to 31 Reserved All OFF (fixed).

Reference 2) List of configuration capabilities
Bit Name Details

0 BOOTP Client ON (fixed)
1 DNS Client OFF (fixed)
2 DHCP Client OFF (fixed)
3 DHCP-DNS Update OFF (fixed)
4 Configuration Settable ON (fixed)
5 to 31 Reserved OFF (fixed)
Reference 3) List of configuration control
Bit Name Details

Displays and sets the IP address setting tool "IP
address setting method".
0: Fixed IP address
0 to 3 Startup Configuration
1: BOOTP
2 to 15: Cannot be set. If set, the general status 09H
5 (Bad attribute data value) is returned.
This bit’s operations are ignored when set to OFF
4 DNS Enable
(fixed).
Appendix
5 to 31 Reserved All OFF (fixed).
General Extended
Name Details
status status
Get_Attributes_All
Get_Attribute_Single 05H - The designated instance ID does not exist.
09H - Written value is illegal.
Set_Attribute_Single
0EH - CanÅft write to designated attribute ID.

Ethernet Link Object (Class ID: F6H)
This object provides information on the Ethernet status.
 Class
 Class service
Data Parameter
type range
Number of Number of instances in gener-
03H R UINT 0001H
Instances ated object
 Instance
5
Appendix
Get_Attribute_Single (0EH), Set_Attribute_Single (10H) and Get_Attributes_All
(01H) are supported.
Data Parameter
type range
Interface
01H Interface communication speed. R UDINT 10, 100
Speed
02H Interface Flags Interface status flag. R DWORD (Reference 1)
ARRAY
Physical Current
03H MAC layer address R of 6
Address value
USINTs
Interface Current
Interface counter -
Counters value
Number of octets received on the
interface. Includes the unneces-
Current
In Octets sary multicast packets and dis- UDINT
value
04H carded packets counted with In R
Discards.
Number of octets received on the
In Ucast interface. Does not include the Current
UDINT
Packets discarded packets counted with In value
Discards.

Ethernet Link Object
Data Parameter
type range
Number of nonunicast packets
received on the interface. Includes
In NUcast Current
unnecessary multicast packets, UDINT
Packets value
but not discarded packets counted
with In Discards.
Number of inbound packets con-
Current
In Discards taining errors, not including dis- UDINT
value
cards.
Number of received packets con-
Current
In Errors taining errors. Is not included in In UDINT
value
Discards.
04H In Unknown Number of inbound packets with R UDINT 0 (fixed)
Protos unknown protocols.
Number of octects sent on the Current
Out Octets UDINT
interface. value
Out Ucast Number of unicast packets sent Current
UDINT
5 Packets
Out NUcast
on the interface.
Number of nonunicast packets
UDINT
value
Current
Packets sent on the interface. value
Appendix
Number of outbound packets Current

Out Discards UDINT
which were discarded. value
Number of outbound packets con- Current
Out Errors UDINT
taining errors. value
Media
Counter unique to media. Structure -
Counters
Alignment Number of received frames that Current
UDINT
Errors did not have octet integer length. value
Number of received frames that Current
FCS Errors UDINT
did not pass FCS check. value
Single Number of frames sent success-
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Collisions fully with only one collision.
Multiple Number of frames sent success-
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Collisions fully with two or more collisions.
05H SQE Test Number of times SQE test error R
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Errors messenger was generated.
Number of frames whose first
Deferred
transmission was deferred UDINT 0 (fixed)
Transmissions
because media was busy.
Number of collisions detected in
Late Collisions packet transmission more than UDINT 0 (fixed)
512 bytes later.
Number of frames for which trans-
Excessive
mission failed because of exces- UDINT 0 (fixed)
Collisions
sive collisions.

Data Parameter
type range
Number of frames for which trans-
MAC Transmit
mission failed because of internal UDINT 0 (fixed)
Errors
MAC sublayer transmit error.
Number of times carrier sense
Carrier Sense condition was lost or never Current
UDINT
Errors asserted when transmitting value
frames.
05H R
Number of received frames that
Frame Too Current
exceeded the maximum tolerable UDINT
Long value
frame size.
Number of frames lost during
MAC Receive transmission on the interface due
UDINT 0 (fixed)
Errors to an internal sublayer receive
error.
Interface Settings for following physical Following
-
Control interface. structure
06H
Control Bits
Interface control bit (Designate
AutoNego, full duplex) W
WORD (Reference 2) 5
Forced Setting
Operation speed forced by inter-
Interface UINT
Appendix
Speed
face. (Fixed to 10 Mbps, etc.) value*1
*1 The following interface speed can be set for Forced Interface Speed.
When auto-negotiation is disabled (half-duplex): 10 Mbps fixed (setting value: 10)
When auto-negotiation is enabled (half-duplex/full duplex): 100/10 Mbps auto-
matic (setting value: 0 or 100)
Reference 1) List of interface flags
Bit Name Details

OFF: Non-active link
0 Link Status
ON: Active link
OFF: Half-duplex
1 Half/FullDuplex
ON: Full duplex (OFF when Link Status=0)
0: Executing auto-negotiation.
1: Auto-negotiation and speed detection failed.
2: Auto-negotiation failed and speed detection suc-
2 to 4 NegotiationStatus ceeded.
3: Speed and duplex mode negotiation succeeded.
4: Couldn’t execute auto-negotiation (when communi-
cation speed is 10 Mbps fixed).
OFF: Changes can be automatically applied.
Manual
5 ON: Reset service is required to apply changes
SettingRequires Speed
(fixed).
6 Local Hardware Fault OFF (fixed)

Reference 2) List of control bits
Bit Name Details

OFF: Auto-negotiation invalid (Communication setting
fixed to 100 Mbps)
0 Auto-negotiate
ON: Auto-negotiation valid (Communication setting
fixed to 100/10 Mpbs auto)
1 ForcedDuplex Mode OFF (fixed)
General Extended
Name Details
status status
Get_Attributes_All
5 Get_Attribute_Single
00H
05H
-
-
The process ended normally.
The designated instance ID does not exist.
Appendix

09H - Written value is illegal.
Object cannot execute requested service in
Set_Attribute_Single 0CH -
current state.
0EH - Can’t write to designated attribute ID.

5-6 Functions which Cannot be Set in Duplicate
When functions that cannot be set or used at the same time are set via communica-
tion, the function with the lower priority will be invalidated or canceled.
Also, setting errors can be checked with the status (bit11: Sensor Setting Error) of the
cyclic communication data of the NU-EP1.
FS-N40 Series
Sensor
Function 2
Function 1 (Priority: High) Function 2 (Priority: Low) setting
operation
error
HSPD Interference Prevention Double Invalid state
Power Modes
S-HSPD Display Gain Full Invalid state
Preset Start Cancel
Zero-shift Start Cancel
External input invalid
External Input function Zero-shift ON
state
Rising Edge Detec-
Detection Limit Detection Setting Valid Invalid state ON
tion Mode Falling
Mode "---- ----" appears on
Edge Detection
(Output 1)
Mode Display Bar Setting Valid amplifier’ s digital
display.
"---- ----" appears on
ON
5
Display Hold
Sub Display amplifier’ s digital ON
Gain % Hold
display.
Appendix
Execution not possi-
Preset Start
ble (cancel)
Execution not possi-
Zero-shift Start
ble (cancel)
Detection
Mode DATUM Mode External Input function Zero-shift ON
state
(Output 1)
Preset Saturation Level Other than 101 Functions as 101.
Sub Display Gain % Hold amplifier’ s digital ON
display.
Limit Detection Set-
Valid Invalid state ON
Detection ting
Area Detection Mode
Mode "---- ----" appears on
Area % Mode Display Hold
(Output 1) Sub Display amplifier’ s digital ON
Gain % Hold
display.
Detection Mode Execution not possi-
Zero-shift Calibration Preset Start
(Output 1) ble
External Input Execution not possi-
Zero-shift Preset Start ON
function ble
Area Detection Mode
Area % Mode
DATUM Mode
Detection Mode Normal Detection
Rising Edge Detec- OFF
(Output 1) Mode
tion Mode
Falling Edge Detec-
Power Modes S-HSPD tion Mode
External Input function Reset Cancel ON
Limit Detection Setting Valid Invalid state ON
Display Hold
Sub Display amplifier’ s digital ON
Gain % Hold
display.
Power Save FULL Invalid state

FS-N10 Series
Sensor
Function 2
operation
error
Interference
Double Invalid state
Power Mode HIGH SPEED Prevention
Display Gain Full Invalid state
Preset Start Cancel
Zero-shift Start Cancel
Preset External input invalid
Rising Edge Control Input ON
Detection Zero-shift state
Detection Mode
Mode Detection Mode Operates as Normal
Falling Edge Limit Setting Output ON
(Output 1) (Output 2) Detection Mode.
Detection Mode
Bar Excess Gain (%) "---- ----" appears on
Sub Display Excess Gain HOLD amplifier’ s digital ON
(%) display.
Execution not
Preset Start
possible (cancel)
Execution not
Zero-shift Start
possible (cancel)
Detection Preset External input invalid
5 Mode
(Output 1)
DATUM 1 Mode
DATUM 2 Mode
Control Input
Preset Satuation
Level
Zero-shift
Other than 101
state
Functions as 101.
ON

Excess Gain HOLD
Appendix
Sub Display amplifier's digital ON

(%)
display.
Detection Mode Operates as Normal
Limit Setting Output ON
Detection (Output 2) Detection Mode.
Mode Area Detection Mode Bar Excess Gain (%) "---- ----" appears on
(Output 1) Sub Display Excess Gain HOLD amplifier's digital ON
(%) display.
DATUM 1 Mode
DATUM 2 Mode
Detection Area Detection Mode
Mode Rising Edge Sensitivity Setting Zero-shift Calibration Invalid state
(Output 1) Detection Mode
Falling Edge
Detection Mode
Execution not
Preset Start
Sensitivity possible (cancel)
Zero-shift Calibration
Setting External input invalid
Control Input Preset ON
state
Execution not
Control Input Preset Zero-shift Start
possible (cancel)
Execution not
Control Input Zero-shift Preset Start
possible (cancel)
Interference
Power Save All Double Invalid state
Prevention

LV-N10 Series
Sensor
Function 2
operation
error
Interference
Double Invalid state
Power Mode HIGH SPEED Prevention
Display Gain Full Invalid state
Preset Request / Work-Preset Request / Execution not
Maximum Sensitivity Preset: Request possible (cancel)
Execution not
Full Auto Preset: Start
possible (cancel)
Rising Edge Zero-shift Request Cancel
Detection
Detection Mode Preset External input invalid
Mode External Input ON
Falling Edge Zero-shift state
(Output 1)
Detection Mode Detection Mode Operates as Normal
(Output 2) Detection Mode.
Sub Display Excess Gain HOLD amplifier's digital ON
(%) display.
Execution not
Preset Request
possible (cancel)
Detection
Zero-shift Request
Execution not
possible (cancel)
5
DATUM 1 Mode External Input Preset Zero-shift ON
Mode state
DATUM 2 Mode
Appendix
(Output 1) Preset Saturation
Other than 101 Functions as 101.
Level
Excess Gain HOLD
Sub Display amplifier's digital ON
(%)
display.
Detection Mode Operates as Normal
Detection (Output 2) Detection Mode.
Mode Area Detection Mode Bar Excess Gain (%) "---- ----" appears on
(Output 1) Sub Display Excess Gain HOLD amplifier's digital ON
(%) display.
DATUM 1 Mode
DATUM 2 Mode
Detection Area Detection Mode
Mode Rising Edge Sensitivity Setting Zero-shift Calibration Invalid state
(Output 1) Detection Mode
Falling Edge
Detection Mode
Sensitivity Execution not
Zero-shift Calibration Full Auto Preset: Start
Setting possible (cancel)
External Input Preset ON
state
Execution not
External Input Preset Zero-shift Request
possible (cancel)
External Input Zero-shift
Execution not
possible (cancel)
Interference
Prevention
For items other than listed above, some functions cannot be set depending on the
connected sensor head. Therefore, make sure to execute the initial reset
(initialization) of the sensor amplifier after changing the sensor head.

PS-N10 Series
Sensor
Function 2
operation
error
Execution not
Rising Edge possible (cancel)
Detection Detection Mode Zero-shift Request Cancel
Mode Falling Edge Preset External input invalid
External Input ON
Detection Mode Zero-shift state
Sub Display Excess Gain HOLD amplifier’ s digital ON
(%) display.
Execution not
Preset Request
possible (cancel)
Execution not
Zero-shift Request
possible (cancel)
Detection DATUM 1 Mode External Input Preset Zero-shift ON
state
Mode DATUM 2 Mode
Preset Saturation
5 Level
Sub Display
Other than 101
Excess Gain HOLD

Functions as 101.
amplifier’ s digital ON
(%)
display.
Appendix

Detection
Area Detection Mode Sub Display Excess Gain HOLD amplifier’ s digital ON
Mode
(%) display.
DATUM 1 Mode
DATUM 2 Mode
Area Detection Mode
Detection
Rising Edge Sensitivity Setting Zero-shift Calibration Invalid state
Mode
Detection Mode
Falling Edge
Detection Mode
Sensitivity Execution not
Zero-shift Calibration Full Auto Preset: Start
Setting possible (cancel)
External Input Preset ON
state
Execution not
External Input Preset Zero-shift Request
possible (cancel)
External Input Zero-shift
Execution not
possible (cancel)
Interference
Prevention

MU-N/LR-T Series
Sensor
Function 2
operation
error
Switching Out 1/
I/O Function Output 1+Input Output 2 Output 1 ON
Out 2
Output 1 Mode Window Detection Mode DATUM mode Standard ON
Output 2 Mode Window Detection Mode DATUM mode Standard ON
Switching Out 1/
Output 2 Mode Stability Error Output 2 Output 1 ON
Out 2
4 ms (Class2)/
Response 5 ms (Class1) Received Light Low
High ON
Time 13 ms (Class2)/ Sensitivity Mid
23 ms (Class1)
Off delay
Output 1 timer On delay Graphic Mode On Triger Stops the graph drawing update
One-shot
5
MU-N/LR-W Series
Appendix
Sensor
Function 2
operation
error
Detection Mode
Output Mode Binary I Auto ON
(ALL, 1 to 16)
Output Mode Binary Response Time 0 1 ON
External Input
Output Mode Binary Tuning Invalid state ON
Function
Output Mode Binary Timer Mode 1 One-shot Invalid state ON
A-1 (Difference
Monitoring)
Output Mode Binary Spot/Mode Selection 1spot ON
A-2 (2-Point
Matching)
Output Mode 4-Output, 2-Bank Bank selection 2 or more 0 ON
Output Mode 4-Output, 2-Bank Cannel Selection 4 or more 0 ON
Output Mode 4-Output, 2-Bank Spot/Mode Selection A-1 (Tuning Free) 1spot ON
Timer function On delay
of the selected Off delay Graphic Mode On Peak Stops the graph drawing update
bank One-shot
Timer function On delay
of the selected Off delay Graphic Mode On Trigger Stops the graph drawing update
bank One-shot

FD-XA2
Connected Sensor
Function 2
sensor Function 1 (Priority: High) Function 2 (Priority: Low) setting
operation
head error
Setting value
Hysteresis
Larger than 9999 9999 (Minimum
Zero-cut flow rate
- - (Minimum resolution resolution stan- ON
Simulation flow rate
standard) dard)
Simulation shot
amount
0: Green - Off
Detection Head indicator 1: Off - Red
Shot mode 2: Green - Red
Common mode(ch.1) illumination mode 3: PMI (Predictive
Maint Info)
Detection
Shot mode
mode(ch.1/2) Lower than mimimum
Off/Flow rate Zero-cut flow rate Minimum value ON
Input 1 func- value
zero input
tion selection
Flow display 0: 0.001 1: 0.01 ON
5 Flow unit Gallon

resolution 4: 10 3: 1 ON
Flow display
0: 0.001, 1: 0.01 2: 0.1 ON
Liter resolution
Appendix
Flow unit
Integrated flow unit 0: 0.01 1: 0.1 ON
Gallon Integrated flow unit 0: 0.01 1: 0.1 ON
FD-XS1 Pipe bore diameter

- - 3 to 5 2: ø3 ON
selection
Pipe outer diameter Larger than maximum Maximum value

- - ON
input value (550) (550)
Larger than maximum Maximum value

- - Pipe thickness input ON
value (200) (200)
Flow display
0: 0.001, 1: 0.01 2: 0.1 ON
Liter resolution
Flow unit
Gallon Integrated flow unit 0: 0.01 1: 0.1 ON
FD-XS8 Pipe bore diameter

- - 3 to 5 2: 1/4" ON
selection
Lower than mimimum Minimum value

- - ON
Pipe outer diameter value (550) (550)
input Larger than maximum Maximum value
- - ON
value (850) (850)
Flow display
3: 1, 4: 10 2: 0.1 ON
Liter resolution
Integrated flow unit 5: 1000, 6: 10000 4: 100 ON

Flow unit
FD-XS20 Integrated flow unit 5: 1000, 6: 10000 4: 100 ON
[standard] Gallon Shot display
3: 1 2: 0.1 ON
resolution
Pipe outer diameter Lower than mimimum Minimum value

- - ON

Connected Sensor
Function 2
operation
head error
Flow display
0: 0.001, 1: 0.01 2: 0.1 ON
Liter resolution

FD-XS20 Flow unit
[high
resolution] Gallon Shot display
ON
resolution
Pipe outer diameter Lower than mimimum Minimum value

- - ON
Appendix

FD-XA2E
Connected Sensor
Function 2
operation
head error
Setting value
Larger than 9999 9999 (Minimum
Hysteresis
- - (Minimum resolution resolution stan- ON
Zero-cut flow rate
standard) dard)
Common Simulation flow rate
Flow display 1: 0.01 2: 0.1 ON

Flow unit Gallon
resolution 4: 10 3: 1 ON
Flow display
Flow unit Liter 1: 0.01, 2: 0.1 3: 1 ON
FD- resolution
XS1E Pipe bore diameter
- - 3 to 5 2: ø3 ON
selection
Flow display
Flow unit Liter 1: 0.01, 2: 0.1 3: 1 ON
FD- resolution
XS8E Pipe bore diameter
5 FD-
- -
selection
Flow display
3 to 5 2: 1/4" ON
Flow unit Liter 3: 1, 4: 10 2: 0.1 ON

XS20E resolution
Appendix
LR-XN10
Function 2 Sensor setting

Function 1 (Priority: High) Function 2 (Priority: Low)
operation error
4 units
Response Time 500us Interference OFF ON
8 units
OFF
* Automaticaly
Response Time 500us Masking ON ON
masked when
calibration.
Detection Mode Area Detection Detection Mode DATUM Standard ON
Detection Mode Area Detection Sub Display Hold Display "---- -----" is displayed ON
Detection Mode DATUM Sub Display Hold Display "---- -----" is displayed ON
Detection Mode DATUM Clamp Function ON OFF ON

LR-XN12*
Function 1 Function 2 Function 2 Sensor setting

(Priority: High) (Priority: Low) operation error
Standard Area
Response Time 500us Detection Mode2 Error Output ON
Detection
4 units
Response Time 500us Interference OFF ON
8 units
OFF
* Automaticaly
Response Time 500us Masking ON ON
masked when
calibration.
Detection Mode1/2 Area Detection Detection Mode DATUM Standard ON
Detection Mode1 Area Detection Sub Display Hold Display "---- -----" is displayed ON
Detection Mode DATUM Sub Display Hold Display "---- -----" is displayed ON
Detection Mode DATUM Clamp Function ON OFF ON
Gyro Alert
Gyro Monitor OFF Detection Mode2 Standard ON
Error + Gyro
Appendix

5-7 Current Value Property of the Sensor
Using the the "Current value property", you can check if the sensor connected to the
NU-EP1 is operating as intended.
There are three types of the current value property - "Disabled", "Upper limit over" and
"Lower limit over".
The current value property is assigned as the following communication data.
Communication
Assigned area
method
Cyclic communication IN Area: Address 8 to 13
Message communication Instance ID: 00H, Attribute ID: 68H, 8DH, 8EH, 8FH
When the sensor is in the following status, the bit corresponding to "Current Value
Property", "Current Value Over Range", "Current Value Under Range", or "Current
Value Invalid" turns ON.
Sensor display for the current value
Sensor Current value property
property
5 LV-N10 Series
+LV-S31
Disable
Upper limit over
Lower limit over



Disable N/A
When connecting AP-41/41M/44 : 
Appendix
Upper limit over

AP-N10 Series When connecting AP-43/48 : 
When connecting AP-41/41M/44 : 
Lower limit over
When connecting AP-43/48 : 
Disable 
MU-N12 / LR-T* Upper limit over N/A
Lower limit over NEAR
Disable 
MU-N12 / LR-W* Upper limit over uuuu
Lower limit over nnnn
Disable 
MU-N12 / FD-Q Upper limit over 
Lower limit over 
Disable ----
FD-X Upper limit over N/A
Lower limit over 
Disable 
LR-X Series Upper limit over N/A
Lower limit over N/A
Disable
Other than the above Upper limit over N/A
Lower limit over

5-8 List of Character String Codes
If the "sub display" is set to "TAG display" when a character string is stored in the "TAG
character string", the character string can be displayed on the amplifier. The following
character strings can be used.
Code Character 7-segment Code Character 7-segment Code Character 7-segment

(HEX) string display (HEX) string display (HEX) string display
Appendix
* If a code which is not assigned to the 7-segment display is set, the character string
will remain blank on the display.

5-9 Index
This index provides a list of terms used in this document in alphabetical order.
C I
Checking the Package Contents ......... 1-3 Installation and Connection to
Package Contents ....................... 1-3 Sensor Amplifiers .................................2-3
Configuring Communication with Connectable sensor amplifiers
NU-EP1 ............................................. 2-11 and quantities ..............................2-3
NU-EP1 Settings ....................... 2-11 Connecting the Sensor
Configuring Communication with Amplifier .......................................2-4
the Scanner ....................................... 2-14
Setting the Scanner ................... 2-14 M
Cyclic Communication ......................... 3-6
Assignment to IN Area Message Communication ..................3-26
(NU-EP1 to Scanner) ................ 3-11 Basic Format for Message
Assignment to OUT Area Communication and
(Scanner to NU-EP1) ................ 3-17 Flow of Process .........................3-30
Checking the Device Configuring Message
Communication ..........................3-27
5 Compatibility .............................. 3-25
Configuring Cyclic How to Use NU Objects .............3-32
Objects and Services .................3-28
Communication ........................... 3-8
Cyclic communication data Objects Usable with NU-EP1 .....3-29
Appendix
assignment ................................ 3-18

Usable Connections .................... 3-9 N
D NU-EP1 EtherNet/IP Communication

Function ...............................................3-3
Data Processing Time ......................... 4-3 Assigning the Sensor
Default Settings ................................... 5-6 ID Number ...................................3-4
Device Profile ...................................... 5-2 NU-EP1 Overview ................................1-2
Dimensions .......................................... 4-4 Overview ......................................1-2
Types and Number of Connectable
F Sensor Amplifiers .........................1-2
Functions which Cannot be Set in O

Duplicate
FD-XA2 ..................................... 5-40 Objects for Use with the NU-EP1 .......5-18
FD-XA2E ................................... 5-42 Assembly Object
FS-N10 Series ........................... 5-36 (Class ID: 04H) ..........................5-23
FS-N40 Series ........................... 5-35 Connection Manager Object
LR-XN10 ................................... 5-42 (Class ID: 06H) ..........................5-25
LR-XN12* .................................. 5-43 Ethernet Link Object
LV-N10 Series ........................... 5-37 (Class ID: F6H) ..........................5-31
MU-N/LR-T Series ..................... 5-39 Identify Object (Class ID: 01H) ..5-19
MU-N/LR-W Series ................... 5-39 List of Usable Objects ................5-18
PS-N10 Series .......................... 5-38 Message Router Object
(Class ID: 02H) ..........................5-22
Reading Each Object Table .......5-18
(Class ID: F5H) ..........................5-27

5-9 Index
P
Parameter List ................................... 3-37
AP-N10/N10D ............................ 3-98
FD-XA2 .................................... 3-133
FD-XA2E ................................. 3-146
FS-N10/N12 .............................. 3-53
FS-N14 ...................................... 3-64
FS-N40/N42*/N44* .................... 3-41
LR-X Series ............................. 3-153
LV-N10/N12/N12C .................... 3-75
MU-N/FD-Q ............................. 3-124
MU-N/LR-T .............................. 3-104
MU-N/LR-W ............................. 3-112
NU-EP1 ..................................... 3-38
PS-N10/N12 .............................. 3-87
Reading the NU Object Table ... 3-37
Part Names .......................................... 1-4
Procedures for Communicating with
an Allen-Bradley ControlLogix PLC ..... 5-7
Procedures for communicating
5
with an Allen-Bradley
Appendix
ControlLogix PLC ........................ 5-7
Procedures for Communication with
an Allen-Bradley SLC5/05 PLC ... 5-13
S
Specifications ...................................... 4-2
Steps for Preparing to
Use the NU-EP1 .................................. 2-2
Flow from Installation to
Communication Configuration ..... 2-2
T
Troubleshooting ................................... 5-3
W
What is EtherNet/IP? ........................... 3-2
What is EtherNet/IP? ................... 3-2
Wiring .................................................. 2-6
Connecting the Communication
Cable ........................................... 2-6
Power supply ............................... 2-8

Revision History
Print date Edition Description

August, 2010 1st edition
December, 2010 1st revised edition
March, 2011 Second revision, The PS-N10 Series is added, etc.
first edition
July, 2012 2nd edition
January, 2016 3rd revision The LR-W Series is added.
1st edition
March, 2016 3rd revision The LR-T Series and FD-Q Series is added.
2nd edition
September, 2016 3rd revision The AP-N10 Series is added.
3rd edition
October, 2017 4th revision The FS-N40 Series is added.
1st edition
November, 2017 4th revision
2nd edition
May, 2018 5th revision The FD-X Series is added.
1st edition
November, 2018 5th revision
2nd edition
July, 2019 5th revision
3rd edition
February, 2020 6th revision
1st edition
November, 2020 7th revision The LR-X Series is added.
1st edition
-EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

WARRANTIES AND DISCLAIMERS
(1) KEYENCE warrants the Products to be free of defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one
(1) year from the date of shipment. If any models or samples were shown to Buyer, such models or
samples were used merely to illustrate the general type and quality of the Products and not to represent
that the Products would necessarily conform to said models or samples. Any Products found to be
defective must be shipped to KEYENCE with all shipping costs paid by Buyer or offered to KEYENCE for
inspection and examination. Upon examination by KEYENCE, KEYENCE, at its sole option, will refund
the purchase price of, or repair or replace at no charge any Products found to be defective. This warranty
does not apply to any defects resulting from any action of Buyer, including but not limited to improper
installation, improper interfacing, improper repair, unauthorized modification, misapplication and
mishandling, such as exposure to excessive current, heat, coldness, moisture, vibration or outdoors air.
Components which wear are not warranted.
(2) KEYENCE is pleased to offer suggestions on the use of its various Products. They are only suggestions,
and it is Buyer's responsibility to ascertain the fitness of the Products for Buyer’s intended use. KEYENCE
will not be responsible for any damages that may result from the use of the Products.
(3) The Products and any samples ("Products/Samples") supplied to Buyer are not to be used internally in
humans, for human transportation, as safety devices or fail-safe systems, unless their written
specifications state otherwise. Should any Products/Samples be used in such a manner or misused in
any way, KEYENCE assumes no responsibility, and additionally Buyer will indemnify KEYENCE and hold
KEYENCE harmless from any liability or damage whatsoever arising out of any misuse of the Products/
Samples.
(4) OTHER THAN AS STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCTS/SAMPLES ARE PROVIDED WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES WHATSOEVER. ALL EXPRESS, IMPLIED, AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES,
INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT OF PROPRIETARY RIGHTS, ARE
EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL KEYENCE AND ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES BE
LIABLE TO ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE,
SPECIAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY DAMAGES
RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, LOSS OF INFORMATION, LOSS
OR INACCURACY OF DATA, LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF SAVINGS, THE COST OF
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTED GOODS, SERVICES OR TECHNOLOGIES, OR FOR ANY
MATTER ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PRODUCTS, EVEN IF KEYENCE OR ONE OF ITS AFFILIATED ENTITIES WAS ADVISED OF A
POSSIBLE THIRD PARTY’S CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OR ANY OTHER CLAIM AGAINST BUYER. In
some jurisdictions, some of the foregoing warranty disclaimers or damage limitations may not apply.
BUYER'S TRANSFER OBLIGATIONS:

If the Products/Samples purchased by Buyer are to be resold or delivered to a third party, Buyer must
provide such third party with a copy of this document, all specifications, manuals, catalogs, leaflets and
written information provided to Buyer pertaining to the Products/Samples.
E 1101-3
Copyright (c) 2020 KEYENCE CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
234046GB 2110-1 968GB Printed in Japan

As 115346 Nu-Ep1 Um 968GB WW GB 2110 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

As 115346 Nu-Ep1 Um 968GB WW GB 2110 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

As 115346 Nu-Ep1 Um 968GB WW GB 2110 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

968GB

Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result

Indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in product

Point Indicates additional information on proper operation.

Reference Indicates tips for better understanding or useful information.

Indicates reference pages.

EtherCAT® is registered trademark and patented technology, licensed by Beckhoff

If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufac-

Precautions for Use

• To avoid injury or failure, turn off the power immediately in the

About the Power Supply

Precautions on Regulations and Standards

2 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual - 3

The manuals relevant to this document are as follows:

NU-EP1 (this unit)

Example) FS-N40 Series

4 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

3 Communication memory linked with the EtherNet/IP unit,

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual - 5

Safety Information for NU-EP1 ...................................................................... 1

Chapter 1 Before Using

1-1 NU-EP1 Overview............................................................................... 1-2

Chapter 2 Connection and Configuration

2-1 Steps for Preparing to Use the NU-EP1 ........................................... 2-2

6 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

3-1 What Is EtherNet/IP?.......................................................................... 3-2

4-1 Specifications..................................................................................... 4-2

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual - 7

5-1 Device Profile ..................................................................................... 5-2

8 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

This document uses the following terms:

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual - 9

10 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual - 1-1

The NU-EP1 functions as an EtherNet/IP communication adaptor. Using EtherNet/IP

 Example of system configuration

PLC or other host device

NU-EP1 (this unit)

Types and Number of Connectable Sensor Amplifiers

Up to16 N-bus compatible sensor amplifiers can be connected to the NU-EP1.

"Connectable Sensor Amplifiers and Quantities" (page 2-3)

1-2 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

NU-EP1 main unit x1 Power supply connector x1

End unit (OP-26751: a set of two pieces) x 1 Instruction manual x1

 List of optional part

• STP (shielded twisted-pair) cable

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual - 1-3

(1) RJ-45 connector

(2) Reset switch

(7) MAC address

(8) Power supply connector

(9) Sensor amplifier connector

1-4 - EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual -

- EtherNet/IP Compatible Network Unit NU-EP1 User's Manual - 2-1

Flow from Installation to Communication Configuration

2 1. Installation and Connection to Sensor Amplifiers

Connecting the Sensor Amplifier (page 2-4)

Assigning the Sensor ID Number (page 3-4)